Panasonic DMR EH575 User Manual

Operating Instructions  
DVD Recorder  
Model No. DMR-EH575  
The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show images of the silver model of  
this unit.  
Region number supported by  
this unit  
Region numbers are allocated to DVD players  
and DVD-Video according to where they are  
sold.  
The region number of this unit is “2”.  
The unit will play DVD-Video marked with  
labels containing “2” or “ALL”.  
Example:  
2
3
2
ALL  
5
Dear customer  
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum  
performance and safety, please read these  
instructions carefully.  
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this  
product, please read the instructions completely.  
Please keep this manual for future reference.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the  
following countries:  
Austria/Belgium/France/Germany/Italy/  
Netherlands/Spain/Switzerland  
(As of end of February 2007)  
This service may not be available in some  
areas in the above countries.  
There may be changes in the service areas.  
RQT8881-L  
EG  
Table of contents  
Getting started  
Editing  
HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Disc handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Main unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Creating playlists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Editing and playing playlists/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Playlist operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Delete Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Deleting titles during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Linked operations with the TV  
(VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link). . . . . . . . . . . 18  
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect  
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
GUIDE Plus+ system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
GUIDE Plus+ data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Editing programme lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Changing the settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Set up to match your television and remote control. . 24  
To enjoy progressive video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Copying  
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Recording  
Convenient functions  
Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Disc Insertion/Ejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
To specify a time to stop recording—One Touch Recording . . . 28  
Recording settings for High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make timer recordings. . . . . 30  
Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer recordings. . . . . . . . . . 32  
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 33  
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Relief Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
VPS/PDC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
HDD and disc management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Deleting all the contents of a disc—Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Selecting the background style–Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first  
–Auto-Play Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment–Finalise . . . . . 60  
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Summary of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
TV System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Manual Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Recording broadcasts from external equipment. . . . . 35  
Making timer recordings on the television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Recording from digital/satellite receiver or decoder . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Linked timer recordings with external equipment  
(digital/satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Reference  
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back cover  
Playing back  
Playing recorded video contents/  
Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Operations during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and  
still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Regarding DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG). . . . 39  
Selecting file type to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Playing DivX discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Playing MP3 discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Pages to be referred to are indicated as “{{” in these  
operating instructions.  
Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
RQT8881  
3
HDD and disc information  
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play  
DVD-RAM  
4.7 GB/9.4 GB, 12 cm  
Hard disk drive (HDD)  
Disc type  
160 GB  
2.8 GB, 8 cm  
Logo  
Indicated in these  
instructions by  
[HDD]  
[RAM]  
DVD Video Recording format  
This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit television broadcasts and so on.  
You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.  
Recording format  
The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.  
Data that can be recorded  
and played  
Video  
Video  
Re-writable§1  
Play on other players§2  
Only on DVD-RAM compatible players.  
Compatible with high  
speed recording§3  
Up to 5X recording speed discs.  
What you can do on this unit (: Can do, –: Cannot do)  
Recording broadcasts that  
allow one copy  
[CPRM (80) compatible discs only.]  
Recording both M 1 and  
M 2 for bilingual  
broadcasts§4  
Recording 16:9 aspect  
picture§4  
Creating and editing  
playlists  
DVD-R DL  
(dual layer on single side)  
You cannot directly record to a  
DVD-R DL disc on this unit (8)  
DVD-R  
4.7 GB, 12 cm  
1.4 GB, 8 cm  
DVD-RW  
4.7 GB, 12 cm  
1.4 GB, 8 cm  
Disc type  
Logo  
[-R] before finalisation  
[-R]DL] before finalisation  
[-RW‹V›] before finalisation  
Indicated in these  
instructions by  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
DVD-Video format  
This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD-Video.  
Recording format  
The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.  
Data that can be recorded  
and played  
Video  
Video  
Video  
Re-writable§1  
Only on DVD-R DL compatible  
players after finalising the disc  
(60, 80).  
Only after finalising the disc  
Play on other players§2  
Only after finalising the disc (60, 80).  
(60, 80).  
Compatible with high  
speed recording§3  
Up to 16X recording speed discs.  
Up to 8X recording speed discs.  
Up to 6X recording speed discs.  
What you can do on this unit (: Can do, –: Cannot do)  
Recording broadcasts that  
allow one copy  
Recording both M 1 and  
[Only one is recorded.(64, Bilingual  
[Only one is recorded.(64,  
Bilingual Audio Selection)]  
[Only one is recorded.(64,  
Bilingual Audio Selection)]  
M 2 for bilingual  
Audio Selection)]  
broadcasts§4  
Recording 16:9 aspect  
picture§4  
Creating and editing  
playlists  
RQT8881  
(continued on the next page)  
4
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play  
(continued)  
+R DL  
+R§5  
4.7 GB, 12 cm  
(double layer on single side)  
You cannot directly record to a  
+R DL disc on this unit (8)  
Disc type  
Logo  
+RW  
[+R] before finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
[+R]DL] before finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
Indicated in these  
instructions by  
[+RW]  
+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format  
This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.  
You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar way as contents recorded in the DVD-Video  
format.  
Recording format  
The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.  
After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the disc on DVD players and other equipment.  
Data that can be recorded  
and played  
Re-writable§1  
Video  
Video  
Video  
Play on other players§2  
Only on +R DL compatible players  
after finalising the disc (60, 80).  
Only after finalising the disc (60, 80).  
Only on +RW compatible players.  
Compatible with high  
speed recording§3  
Up to 16X recording speed discs.  
Up to 8X recording speed discs.  
Up to 4X recording speed discs.§6  
What you can do on this unit (: Can do, –: Cannot do)  
Recording broadcasts that  
allow one copy  
Recording both M 1 and  
[Only one is recorded.(64,  
M 2 for bilingual  
[Only one is recorded.(64,  
Bilingual Audio Selection)]  
[Only one is recorded.(64,  
Bilingual Audio Selection)]  
Bilingual Audio Selection)]  
broadcasts§4  
Recording 16:9 aspect  
picture§4  
(The picture is recorded in 4:3  
(The picture is recorded in 4:3  
(The picture is recorded in 4:3  
aspect.)  
aspect.)  
aspect.)  
Creating and editing playlists  
§1  
The amount of the recordable disc space doesn’t increase even if the programme is deleted when you use one time recording disc.  
[RAM] Can be played on Panasonic DVD Recorders and DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.  
If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.  
The high speed recording discs listed here are compatible with this unit. However, this is not the copy speed.  
For further information (8, Important notes for recording)  
§2  
§3  
§4  
[Note]  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on secondary audio recording are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this setting  
“Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme (The default setting is “On”. 63).  
+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However, discs that are  
finalised are compatible and can be played.  
§5  
§6  
You can play 8X recording speed discs recorded on another equipment.  
We recommend using Panasonic discs. We also recommend using DVD-RAM discs with cartridges to protect them from scratches and dirt.  
You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.  
You cannot record programmes that allow “One time only recording” to CPRM compatible DVD-R and DVD-RW on this unit. You can record  
other programmes as DVD-Video format.  
This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)  
Finalise  
A process that makes play of a recorded disc possible on equipment that can play such media. After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and  
you can no longer record or edit. (60)  
Formatting  
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment. (59)  
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.  
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.  
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.  
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL  
(Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable  
layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the  
first layer to record a programme, the remainder is  
recorded on the second layer. When playing a title  
When switching layers:  
Video and audio may momentarily cut  
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically  
switches between layers and plays the title in the same  
way as a normal programme. However, video and  
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is  
switching layers.  
Second recordable layer  
The available  
space  
(Inner  
section of the  
disc)  
(Outersection  
of the disc)  
First recordable layer  
DVD-R DL  
+R DL  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Playback direction  
RQT8881  
Recording modes and approximate recording times 27  
5
HDD and disc information  
Play-only discs (12 cm/8 cm)  
Disc type  
DVD-Video  
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)  
Logo  
Indicated in  
these  
[DVD-V]  
[-RW‹VR›]  
instructions by  
Instructions  
High quality movie and music discs  
DVD-RW recorded on another DVD Recorder  
You can play programmes that allow “One time only recording” if they have been  
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.  
By formatting (59) the disc, you can record to it in DVD-Video format and play it  
on this unit.  
It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for recording.  
.
Disc type  
Logo  
DVD-R  
CD  
Video CD  
SVCD  
Indicated in  
these  
DivX, MP3, JPEG  
[CD]  
DivX, MP3, JPEG  
[VCD]  
instructions by  
Instructions  
DVD-R§ with video  
recorded in DivX  
CD-R and CD-RW§  
with video recorded in  
DivX  
Recorded audio and music  
(including CD-R/RW§)  
Recorded music and video (including  
CD-R/RW§)  
DVD-R§ with music  
recorded in MP3  
CD-R and CD-RW§  
with music recorded in  
MP3  
DVD-R§ with still pictures  
recorded in JPEG  
CD-R and CD-RW§  
with still pictures  
recorded in JPEG  
§ Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.  
The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating  
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.  
Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.  
Discs that cannot be played  
2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm  
3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring  
DVD-R recorded in DVD Video Recording format  
DVD-R (DVD-Video format), DVD-R DL (DVD-Video format), DVD-  
RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and  
not finalised (80).  
DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL”  
DVD-Audio  
Blu-ray, HD DVD, AVCHD discs  
DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,  
SACD, MV-Disc, PD  
RQT8881  
6
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD  
for the type of connected TV  
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a  
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.  
(: Possible to view, : Impossible to view)  
Disc/Titles  
recorded on HDD  
TV type  
Yes/No  
PAL  
NTSC  
PAL  
Multi-system TV  
NTSC TV  
PAL TV  
§1  
NTSC  
PAL  
NTSC  
§2 (PAL60)  
§1  
Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (68).  
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals  
the picture will not be shown correctly.  
§2  
When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you  
match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or NTSC) (68).  
RQT8881  
7
Important notes for recording  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
Select the main or secondary audio before  
recording  
When recording a  
bilingual programme  
Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.  
You can change the audio during playback.  
(38, Changing audio during play)  
(64, Bilingual Audio Selection)  
M 1  
However in the following cases, select whether to  
record the main or secondary audio:  
–Recording sound in LPCM (64, Audio Mode for  
XP Recording)  
Hello  
The selected  
audio only is  
recorded.  
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The  
default setting is “On”.  
63)  
M 2  
Hallo  
M 1  
If you record from external equipment  
–Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.  
Hello  
If you record from external equipment  
–Select both “M 1” and “M 2” on the external  
equipment.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+RW]  
About the aspect when  
recording a programme  
If “Aspect for Recording” in the Setup menu is set to  
“Automatic” (The default setting is “Automatic”  
63), the programme will be recorded in the original  
aspect used when recording started (including when  
recording started at a commercial, etc.). If recorded  
with a different aspect, select the correct aspect  
(“16:9” or “4:3”).  
Recorded in 4:3 aspect  
However, in the following cases, programme will be  
recorded in 4:3.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›]  
Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR (recordings  
5 hours or longer)” recording modes will be recorded  
in 4:3 aspect.  
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.  
(The default setting is “On”. 63)  
When you want to copy  
titles in high speed  
mode from the HDD to  
DVD-R, etc.  
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X§); however, the audio and aspect settings  
(above) are necessary before recording to the HDD.  
§ Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.  
Record to the HDD  
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.  
HDD  
It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R,  
+RW or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (80) compatible DVD-RAM.  
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.  
When recording the  
“One time only  
recording” broadcasts  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
[HDD]  
`
(: Can do, –: Cannot do)  
“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They  
are deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.  
Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.  
You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Playing the disc on  
other DVD players  
The disc must be finalised after recording or copying (60).  
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play  
them as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record  
or copy.§  
§You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.  
Play on other DVD equipment  
Record to DVD-R, etc.  
Í
/I  
Í
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC  
1
2
3
4
5
;
1
:/6  
5/9  
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
<OPEN/CLOSE  
H
RC  
SEA  
R
ENTE  
V
O
L
Y
PLA  
DIS  
U
MEN  
OP  
T
URN  
RET  
NU  
ME  
O
N
OFF  
D
C
IN  
9V  
Finalise  
EN  
OP  
ND  
ROU  
UR  
A.S  
E
EP  
EA  
T
R
MOD  
ITOR  
PIC  
MON  
E
M
ODE  
TUR  
Recording to DVD-R DL You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.  
RQT8881  
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.  
and +R DL  
8
It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD drive simultaneously.  
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care  
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device  
that is easily susceptible to damage.  
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.  
The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust  
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be  
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains  
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.  
The HDD is a temporary storage device  
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or  
saving recorded content to a disc.  
Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD  
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this  
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all  
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.  
When the HDD has been automatically entered power save mode (below), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.  
This does not indicate a problem with this unit.  
Setup precautions  
Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or  
Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan  
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.  
Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to  
vibration or impact.  
breakdown  
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,  
etc. gets inside the unit.  
While operating  
Do not place on anything that  
generates heat like a video cassette  
recorder, etc.  
DO NOT  
Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The  
HDD may become damaged.)  
Do not place in an area often subject to  
temperature changes.  
Place in an area where condensation  
does not occur. Condensation is a  
phenomenon where moisture forms on a  
cold surface when there is an extreme change in temperature.  
Condensation may cause internal damage to the unit.  
Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains  
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.  
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or  
movement due to rotation is normal.  
This unit  
VCR  
When moving the unit  
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the  
display.)  
Conditions where condensation may occur  
–When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from  
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or  
when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air  
directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during  
operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on  
the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD  
heads, etc.  
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.  
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.  
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.  
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating  
for a short time.)  
–When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.  
–During the rainy season.  
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit  
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until  
condensation is gone.  
HDD recording time remaining  
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which  
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.  
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist  
will not increase the amount of time.)  
The HDD automatically enters power save mode  
The HDD has been automatically entered power save mode. (The HDD continues to rotate at high speed while the unit is on. In order to extend  
the life of the HDD, the HDD will be entered power save mode if no operation has been performed for 30 minutes while there is no disc on the disc  
tray.)  
While in power save mode play or recording may not start right away because the HDD takes time to be re-activated.  
When not using the unit, we recommend removing the disc in the tray in order to set the HDD to the power save mode.  
Indemnity concerning recorded content  
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or  
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a  
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).  
RQT8881  
9
Disc handling  
How to hold a disc  
Handling precautions  
Do not touch the recorded surface.  
Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc  
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)  
Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt  
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.  
Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static  
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.  
Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.  
Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.  
Do not use the following discs:  
DO  
DO NOT  
Concerning non-cartridge discs  
Be careful about scratches and dirt.  
–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels  
(rental discs, etc.).  
–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.  
–Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart  
shapes.  
If there is dirt or condensation on the disc  
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.  
DO NOT  
DO  
DO NOT  
Do not place in the following areas:  
–In direct sunlight.  
–In very dusty or humid areas.  
–Near a heater.  
–Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature  
(condensation can occur).  
–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.  
To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases  
or cartridges when you are not using them.  
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem  
with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by  
such loss.  
Examples of causes of such losses are  
A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.  
A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.  
A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.  
Unit care  
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the  
DO NOT  
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.  
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.  
Do not place the unit on  
amplifiers or equipment  
that may become hot.  
The heat can damage the unit.  
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.  
Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.  
Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the  
instructions that came with the cloth.  
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and  
viewing pleasure.  
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it  
impossible to record or play discs.  
[Note]  
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.  
Use the DVD lens cleaner about once every year, depending on  
frequency of use and the operating environment. Carefully read the  
lens cleaner’s instructions before use.  
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.  
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the  
unit.  
RQT8881  
10  
Included accessories  
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.  
(Product numbers correct as of February 2007. These may be subject to change.)  
(N2QAYB000124)  
1
Remote control  
1
AC mains lead  
2
RF coaxial cables  
2
Batteries  
for remote control  
1
Audio/video  
cable  
For use with this unit only. Do  
not use it with other equipment.  
Also, do not use cords for other  
equipment with this unit.  
The remote control information  
Batteries  
Use  
Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.  
When closing the lid, insert it from the j (minus) side.  
Remote control signal sensor  
20  
20  
30  
R6/LR6, AA  
30  
Do not use rechargeable type batteries.  
Do not mix old and new batteries.  
7 m directly in front of the unit  
Do not use different types at the same time.  
Do not heat or expose to flame.  
Do not take apart or short circuit.  
Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.  
Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.  
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can  
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.  
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long  
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.  
Remote control operations (12)  
[Note]  
If you cannot operate the unit or television using the remote control  
after changing the batteries, please re-enter the codes  
(24, Television operation).  
RQT8881  
11  
Control reference guide  
Remote control  
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.  
1 Turn the unit on (20)  
?
2 Select drive (HDD or DVD) (26, 36)  
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].  
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers  
4 Delete items (50)  
DVD  
TV  
5 Basic operations for recording and play  
6 Show programme information in the GUIDE Plus+ system  
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (38)  
8 Show Top Menu/DIRECT NAVIGATOR (36, 37, 46)  
9 Show OPTION menu (46)  
: Colour buttons for switching between Video/Playlists, selecting  
character type when entering text, manual tuning settings and  
GUIDE Plus+ operations  
(31, 53, 57, 67)  
; Start recording (26)  
< Change recording mode (26)  
= Select audio (38)  
> Show status messages (45)  
1
Í
Í
@
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
2
3
PAGE  
CH  
2 3  
1
A
B
4 5 6  
ShowView  
8 9  
7
C
D
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
4
5
? Transmit the remote control signal  
@ Television operations (24)  
A Channel select/Change pages in the GUIDE Plus+ system  
(26, 31)  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
B Show SHOWVIEW screen (32)  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
C Input select (AV1, AV2, AV3 or DV) (35, 56)  
D Show Timer Recording screen (32)  
E Exit the menu screen  
F Show the GUIDE Plus+ screen (21, 30)  
G Show FUNCTION MENU window (61)  
H Return to previous screen  
E
F
6
7
I
8
9
G
I Create chapter (38)  
J Skip 30 seconds forward (38)  
K Direct TV recording (18)  
L Linked timer recordings with external equipment (35)  
M Skip the specified time (38)  
OK  
H
OPTION  
RETURN  
N Show on-screen menu (44)  
O Recording functions  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
I
J
MANUAL SKIP  
:
;
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
K
L
M
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
<
=
>
O
RQT8881  
12  
Main unit  
1
3
4
5
2
OPEN/CLOSE  
REC  
6
7 8  
9
:
;
Opening the front panel  
Place your finger on the protruding section below the 4 and  
REC  
press down to flip open the front panel.  
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (20)  
7 Stop (26, 37)  
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In  
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of  
power.  
8 Start play (36)  
9 Start recording (26)/Specify a time to stop recording (28)  
: Open/close disc tray (26, 36)  
2 Disc tray (26, 36)  
; Remote control signal sensor  
3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (56)  
4 Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (16, 56)  
5 Display (below)  
Rear panel terminals (14–17)  
6 Channel select (26)  
The unit’s display  
2
4
1
3
REC  
PLAY  
5
6
7
8
1 Copying indicator  
2 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator  
3
Recording  
indicator  
Playback  
indicator  
Recording/  
Playback indicator  
REC  
REC  
PLAY  
PLAY  
4 Timer recording indicator  
5 Disc indicator  
6 Drive (HDD or DVD) indicator  
7 Main display section indicator  
8 Recording mode indicator  
RQT8881  
13  
STEP 1 Connection  
Make sure to use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables  
Use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables only when you make connections to the unit through its RF IN and RF OUT terminals. Striping may  
appear and disrupt images on the TV if you use different cables for connection.  
Using a 21-pin Scart cable  
You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (18).  
You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (81).  
[Required]setting] “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (65)  
Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.  
Select the connection pattern that matches your environment from pattern A–D. Confirm connections not listed below with your dealer.  
When the unit is not to be used for a long time  
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off  
[approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)]  
When “Power Save” is set to “On”, the “Quick Start” function does not work.  
Connecting a television  
A
Television’s rear panel  
To the aerial  
To household mains socket  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)  
Aerial  
cable  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
AV  
Connecting a terminal other  
than the 21-pin Scart terminal  
(16, 17)  
AC mains lead  
RF coaxial  
cable (included)  
(included)  
3
1
Connect only after all other  
connections are complete.  
2
Fully wired 21-pin  
Scart cable  
4
Cooling fan  
RF  
IN  
Y
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
RF coaxial  
cable  
(included)  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 DECODER/EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
Connecting a television and VCR  
B
Television’s rear panel  
To household mains socket  
To the aerial  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
AV  
Connecting a terminal other  
than the 21-pin Scart  
terminal (16, 17)  
AC mains lead  
(included)  
Connect only after all other  
connections are complete.  
4
5
Fully wired 21-pin  
Scart cable  
RF coaxial cable  
(included)  
6
Cooling fan  
RF  
IN  
Y
PB  
AV1  
(
TV  
)
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 DECODER/EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
RF coaxial cable  
(included)  
DO NOT  
Connect the unit directly to the television  
If you connect the unit through an AV selector  
or video cassette recorder to the television,  
video signal will be affected by copyright  
protection systems and the picture may not  
be shown correctly.  
2
3
Television  
1
21-pin Scart  
cable  
Aerial cable  
VCR  
AV OUT  
VCR’s  
rear panel  
This unit  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
RF OUT  
When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR  
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are  
both television and VCR input terminals.  
[Required]setting]  
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the Setup  
menu (66)  
RQT8881  
14  
Connecting a television and digital/satellite receiver or decoder  
C
To the aerial  
Television’s rear panel  
To household mains socket  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)  
Aerial  
cable  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
AV  
Connecting a terminal other  
than the 21-pin Scart terminal  
(16, 17)  
AC mains lead  
RF coaxial cable  
(included)  
(included)  
Connect only after all other  
connections are complete.  
3
1
2
Fully wired 21-pin  
Scart cable  
5
Cooling fan  
RF  
N  
Y
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
RF coaxial  
cable  
(included)  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITTSTREAMM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 DECODER/EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
4
[Required]setting]  
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the  
21-pin Scart cable  
Setup menu (66)  
AV OUT  
Digital/satellite receiver  
or decoder’s rear panel  
Connecting a television and VCR, digital/satellite receiver or decoder  
D
Television’s rear panel  
To household mains socket  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)  
To the aerial  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
AV  
Connecting a terminal other  
than the 21-pin Scart terminal  
(16, 17)  
AC mains lead  
5
6
(included)  
Connect only after all other  
connections are complete.  
Fully wired 21-pin  
Scart cable  
7
RF coaxial cable  
(included)  
Cooling fan  
RF  
IN  
Y
PB  
AV1  
(
TV  
)
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 DECODER/EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
RF coaxial cable  
(included)  
21-pin Scart cable  
2
1
4
3
Aerial cable  
AV OUT  
AV OUT  
AV IN  
Digital/satellite receiver  
or decoder’s rear panel  
VCR’s rear  
panel  
VHF/UHF  
RF OUT  
RF IN  
[Required]setting]  
“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection” settings in the Setup menu (66)  
Connect the unit directly to the television (14, [B] )  
RQT8881  
15  
STEP 1 Connection  
Other connections  
§
Leave “Yellow” unconnected.  
Connecting a television with AUDIO/VIDEO or  
S VIDEO terminals  
Connecting a VCR with AUDIO/VIDEO or  
S VIDEO terminals  
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the  
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)  
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the VIDEO  
terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)  
Television’s rear panel  
Television’s rear panel  
This unit’s front panel  
This unit’s front panel  
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO  
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO  
R
L
IN  
IN  
R
L
IN  
IN  
Red White Yellow  
Red White  
S Video  
cable  
Yellow White Red  
White Red  
§
Audio/Video cable  
(included)  
S Video  
cable  
§
§
Audio/Video cable  
(included)  
§
Red White Yellow  
Red White  
Red White Yellow  
Red White  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
R
L
R
L
VIDEO S VIDEO  
OUT  
OUT  
VIDEO S VIDEO  
This unit’s rear panel  
This unit’s rear panel  
AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
VCR’s rear panel  
VCR’s rear panel  
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO terminals  
Television’s rear panel  
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or  
progressive output (81) and provide a purer picture than the S  
VIDEO OUT terminal.  
AUDIO IN  
Y
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
R
L
Connect to terminals of the same colour.  
PB  
PR  
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)  
Use component output with progressive “Off” (The default setting  
65), even if it is progressive compatible, because progressive  
output can cause some flickering. This is the same for multi system  
televisions using PAL mode.  
Red White  
Video cable  
§
Audio/Video  
cable  
(included)  
CRT  
§
RF  
IN  
Y
DO NOT  
Red White  
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
Progressive output  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 DECODER/EXT  
This unit  
This unit’s rear panel  
For progressive output (24)  
Connecting an amplifier or system component  
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal  
Connecting a stereo amplifier  
To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an  
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.  
[Required]setting]  
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (64)  
When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an Optical digital  
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you  
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting  
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (65).  
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the  
television.  
Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),  
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.  
You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.  
Amplifier’s rear panel  
AUDIO IN  
R
L
Amplifier’s rear panel  
OPTICAL IN  
Red White  
Optical digital audio cable  
Do not bend sharply when  
connecting.  
Audio cable  
Insert fully, with  
this side facing  
up.  
Y
Red White  
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
This unit’s rear panel  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
PR  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
This unit’s rear panel  
(
)
AV2 DECODER/EXT  
RQT8881  
16  
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) terminal  
HDMI is the next-generation interface for digital devices. When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video  
signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High  
Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.  
Please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.  
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function  
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be  
possible. [18, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)]  
Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilized.  
It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.  
Recommended part number: RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.  
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television  
Television’s  
rear panel  
AV  
Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)  
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following  
functions are available.  
HDMI IN  
Direct TV Recording (18)  
Watching pictures from digital/satellite receiver or  
decoder  
(In this case, make sure to switch the  
television input to “AV”.)  
Fully wired  
21-pin Scart cable  
HDMI cable  
RF  
IN  
Y
[Required]setting]  
PB  
HDMI AV OUT  
AV1  
Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (65).  
(The default setting is “On”.)  
Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical”  
(65).  
(
TV  
)
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 DECODER/EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)  
21-pin Scart cable  
AV OUT  
Digital/satellite receiver or  
decoder’s rear panel  
[Note]  
If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (80) and output  
as 2 channels. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)  
You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.  
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input  
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):  
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)  
§Only when this unit is connected to a Panasonic TV (VIERA)  
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver  
Television’s rear panel  
AV  
HDMI IN  
HDMI cable  
Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)  
above  
Fully wired  
21-pin Scart cable  
HDMI IN  
HDMI OUT  
Receiver’s rear  
panel  
HDMI cable  
[Required]setting] above  
RF  
IN  
Y
PB  
HDMI AV OUT  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 DECODER/EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
RQT8881  
17  
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM/Q Link)  
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using “HDAVI Control” or Q Link.  
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” ?  
What is Q Link?  
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers  
linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or  
receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by  
connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating  
instructions for connected equipment for operational details.  
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions  
provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as  
HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function  
that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with  
other manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC  
cannot be guaranteed.  
Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of  
this unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by  
connecting the equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.  
Preparation  
Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable  
(14).  
For your reference  
The following systems from other manufacturers have similar  
function to Q Link from Panasonic.  
For details, refer to your televisions operating instructions or consult  
your dealer.  
Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)  
DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)  
Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)  
Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)  
SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)  
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 2” function.  
“HDAVI Control 2” is the newest standard (current as of  
February, 2007) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible  
equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s  
conventional HDAVI equipment.  
Preparation  
1. Connect this unit to your TV or receiver with an HDMI cable  
(17).  
2. Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (65). (The default setting is “On”.)  
3. Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment  
(e.g., TV).  
When using HDMI2 terminal of VIERA as “HDAVI Control”,  
set the input channel to HDMI2 on VIERA.  
4. Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this  
unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI  
Control” function works properly.  
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat  
this procedure.  
What you can do with “HDAVI Control” and Q Link  
When you connect the unit to a TV for the first time, the station list data is automatically copied from the TV  
to the unit and the TV stations are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as  
on the TV (20).  
Download from the TV  
[Q]Link]  
(When the TV is on)  
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to  
HDMI input mode and the TV displays the corresponding action.  
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)  
Easy playback  
[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]  
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [ShowView],  
[PROG/CHECK] etc.  
(When the TV is off)  
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and  
displays the corresponding action.  
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)  
Power on link  
[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]  
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [ShowView],  
[PROG/CHECK] etc.  
[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] SVCD and MP3  
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.  
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is  
automatically set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU screen, the status message, or the on-  
screen menu is displayed during playback or when the unit set to a timer recording.  
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time in the  
following conditions:  
Power off link  
[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]  
–when you pressed [¥ REC] and the unit is recording,  
–when copying,  
–when finalising, etc.  
When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable,  
the receiver will also turn off.  
This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV.  
However this function does not work if you select the TV channels on this unit.  
Direct TV Recording  
[Q]Link]  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
The selected drive lights up on the unit’s display.  
If you selected the DVD drive  
Insert a disc. (26)  
Press and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.  
Recording starts.  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
§1 This button is available only when this unit is on.  
§2 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents  
from where playback started.  
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.  
RQT8881  
[Note]  
These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.  
About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.  
18  
Easy control only with VIERA remote control  
If you connect this unit to the TV that has “HDAVI Control 2” function with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions.  
You can operate this unit using the following buttons on the TV remote control.  
[3, 4, 2, 1], [OK], [RETURN], [EXIT], [OPTION] and the coloured buttons.  
Use the remote control for this unit to operate any other buttons (numbered buttons, etc.) that are not listed above.  
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.  
Using the FUNCTION  
MENU window to  
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window using the TV remote control.  
If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.  
operate this unit  
[VIERA]Link]  
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV  
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
remote control, and press [OK].  
Playback  
Recording  
Delete  
Copy  
To Others  
OK  
RETURN  
About the FUNCTION MENU  
window (61).  
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (below) and display the Top  
Menu for DVD-Video.  
Using the OPTION  
menu window to  
Control Panel  
Control Panel is  
displayed (below).  
1 Press [OPTION].  
operate this unit  
e,g.,  
[VIERA]Link]  
FUNCTION MENU FUNCTION MENU  
window is displayed  
Control Panel  
FUNCTION MENU  
Top Menu  
(above).  
Menu  
Top Menu [DVD-V]  
Menu [DVD-V]  
Top menu is displayed  
(37).  
Drive Select  
OK  
RETURN  
Menu is displayed  
(37).  
[Note]  
Drive Select  
Select the HDD or DVD  
drive  
You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu  
for DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD-Video is  
copying.  
Rotate RIGHT  
(JPEG)  
Rotate the still picture  
(43).  
2 Select an item then press [OK].  
Rotate LEFT  
(JPEG)  
Zoom in (JPEG)  
Zoom out (JPEG)  
Enlarge or shrink the still  
picture (43).  
Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote  
control.  
Perform steps 1 and 2 of “Using the OPTION MENU window to operate this unit” (above).  
Using the Control  
Panel  
The Control Panel is displayed (right).  
When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.  
Control Panel  
Pause  
–[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]:  
Play, [EXIT]: Exit the screen.  
Exit  
Search  
Play  
Search  
While playing still pictures  
–[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit  
the screen.  
Stop  
When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode  
Press [Í DVD] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.  
When not using “HDAVI Control”  
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (65).  
RQT8881  
19  
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings  
After set up is complete, TV aspect setting screen appears.  
TV Aspect  
16:9 WIDE TV  
4:3 TV  
16:9  
Pan & Scan  
Letterbox  
DVD  
TV  
SELECT  
Í DVD  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
OK  
DRIVE  
RETURN  
SELECT  
AV  
16:9: When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television  
Pan & Scan:When connected to a 4:3 aspect television  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Titles are recorded as they appear on screen.  
[DVD-V]  
PAGE  
CH  
W X  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
CH  
Numbered  
buttons  
ShowView  
8 9  
7
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
Video recorded for a widescreen is  
played as Pan & Scan (unless prohibited  
by the producer of the disc) (81).  
0
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SSEARCH  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
Letterbox:When connected to a 4:3 aspect television  
Widescreen picture is shown in the letterbox  
style (81).  
EXIT  
GUIDE  
I
3 Press [3, 4] to select the TV  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
aspect and press [OK].  
3,4,2,1  
OPTION  
RETURN  
When television type and aspect is set, the GUIDE Plus+  
setting screen appears.  
OK  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
OPTION  
Auto-Setup  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
Do you want to setup  
the GUIDE Plus+ system ?  
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
Yes  
No  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
(The above message also appears in countries where GUIDE  
Plus+ system is not available. However set up is not possible.)  
If you want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
Proceed to step 2 (21, GUIDE Plus+ system settings)  
1 Turn on the television and select the  
If you do not want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system or if  
you live in a country where GUIDE Plus+ system is not  
available (21, GUIDE Plus+ system)  
appropriate AV input to suit the  
connections to this unit.  
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [OK].  
Television picture appears. Set up is complete.  
2 Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.  
When connecting to a television that has the Q Link functions  
To change the on-screen menu language to  
(18), downloading from the television starts.  
English  
Download from TV  
1 While stopped, Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Weit. Funktionen” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Display” and press [1].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Sprachauswahl” and press [OK].  
6 Press [3, 4] to select “English” and press [OK].  
7 Press [EXIT].  
Pos  
4
Download in progress. Please wait.  
RETURN: to cancel  
RETURN  
You can download the tuning positions from the television.  
This unit’s Auto Clock Setting function synchronizes the time  
when the TV channel that is broadcasting time and date  
information is tuned.  
To stop partway  
Press [RETURN].  
If the Country setting menu appears on the television.  
Länderauswahl  
If the clock setting menu appears  
Deutschland  
Set the clock manually (69).  
Italia  
Nederland  
Österreich  
To confirm that stations have been tuned  
Andere  
SELECT  
correctly (67)  
OK  
RETURN  
To restart set up (68)  
RETURN: verlassen OK: anwählen  
Press [3, 4] to select the country and press [OK].  
Auto-Setup starts. This takes about 8 minutes.  
RQT8881  
20  
GUIDE Plus+ system settings  
GUIDE Plus+ system  
3
One of the following screens will appear  
Confirm the message on the screen.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system provides programme information from  
the host station displayed on the television like a TV programme  
magazine. Setting up to record a broadcast is easy too. Simply  
select the desired programme from the displayed list. You can  
also search for desired programmes by displaying only the  
programmes in a certain category.  
Landscape  
Prog. Type  
All Types  
12.1 Wed  
12.1. Wed 15:05  
7th Heaven  
15:30  
15:05~16:05  
16:00  
16:30  
Time: 15:00  
Fliege-Die Talkshow  
Bianca-Wege...  
Ta... Abenteuer...  
ARD  
ZDF  
...  
Derrick Heute in ...  
Das Jugendgericht  
Das Familiengericht  
RTL  
The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the following countries:  
Austria/Belgium/France/Germany/Italy/Netherlands/  
Spain/Switzerland  
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...  
SAT1  
***06  
PRO7  
MDR  
-24 Hr  
If “No Data”  
appears (22,  
Editing  
...  
7th Heaven  
Gilmore...  
No Data  
...  
Abenteuerurlaub  
+24 Hr  
Aktuell  
(As of end of February 2007)  
Prog. Type  
programme  
lists,  
Reference)  
This service may not be available in some areas in the above  
countries.  
There may be changes in the service areas.  
TIMER REC  
RETURN  
info  
GUIDE  
OPTION  
Display Mode  
PAGE-  
PAGE+  
GUIDE Plus+ download is completed.  
[Note]  
You will need to complete Channel reception settings (20) to  
setup the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system setup will not work if the clock is not  
set correctly.  
12.1. Wed 15:05  
Setup  
The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system data is only possible  
via the antenna input of this unit. The receipt of the GUIDE  
Plus+ data via externally connected satellite receivers or digital  
set-top boxes is not possible.  
No Host Channel was detected.  
Please refer to Operating Instructions.  
Press OK to continue.  
Visit following homepage for more information.  
OK  
RETURN  
GUIDE Plus+ system is not available.  
Check the host channel of your country.  
(23, Host Channel)  
1 Press [GUIDE].  
12.1. Wed 15:05  
12.1. Wed 15:05  
Postal Code  
Setup  
Current Country: Germany  
Data download was unsuccessful.  
Next download time slot will be at XX:XX.  
This unit downloads GUIDE Plus+ data several times  
a day.  
Clicking noise may be heard at that time.  
Press OK to continue.  
OK  
OK  
0
~
9
RETURN  
RETURN  
To download GUIDE Plus+ data, turn off your unit at the time  
displayed on the screen or download the data manually from  
“Data Download” in the Setup menu at that time.  
(23, Changing the settings)  
2 Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons  
to enter the Postal Code of your  
location and press [OK].  
To stop partway  
Press [RETURN].  
12.1. Wed 15:05  
Setup  
No  
Yes  
Do you want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system?  
It may take time up to 2 hours.  
For further information about operating the GUIDE Plus+  
programme list, refer to “Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system”.  
(31)  
OK  
[Note]  
RETURN  
If your Postal Code changes, you can update this information later in  
the Setup of the GUIDE Plus+ system (23, Changing the  
settings).  
It may take up to 2 hours to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
If you want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
If you do not want to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system  
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [OK].  
To download the GUIDE Plus+ data later  
(22, GUIDE Plus+ data download)  
RQT8881  
21  
GUIDE Plus+ system settings  
Refer to the control reference on page 20.  
Editing programme lists  
GUIDE Plus+ data download  
The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel (the  
television station transmitting the television programme list) several  
times a day. Data will be transmitted at 2:50 AM every day.  
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.  
1 Press [GUIDE].  
2 Press [OPTION].  
Landscape  
12.1 Wed  
Prog. Type  
All Types  
12.1. Wed 15:05  
There are 2 ways to download GUIDE Plus+ data.  
–Download automatically when the unit is turned off.  
–Download manually from “Data Download” in the Setup menu.  
Gilmore girls  
16:05~17:05  
15:30  
16:00  
16:30  
Time: 15:00  
Fliege-Die Talkshow  
Bianca-Wege...  
Ta... Abenteuer...  
ARD  
ZDF  
...  
Derrick Heute in ...  
Das Jugendgericht  
Das Familiengericht  
RTL  
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...  
SAT1  
RTL2  
VOX  
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade  
...  
7th Heaven  
Yu-...  
Gilmore...  
Download data automatically  
...  
Die Abschl... F
PRO7  
Setup  
Editor  
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded automatically when the unit  
is turned off.  
OK  
RETURN  
During download, “GUIDE” appears in  
the display of your unit.  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Editor” and  
press [OK].  
CH DC BS DUB EXT Link MPEG4 D.MIX  
NET  
-
DVD AVCD  
PLAY  
HDD  
-
+
RWRAM  
SP  
PLAY  
PC  
DVD  
SD  
LP VR  
EP SDPC  
12.1. Wed 15:05  
Editor  
On/Off  
Reference  
Name  
WDR  
Source  
Tuner  
Tuner  
If you turn on the unit while “GUIDE” appears, the data update is  
interrupted.  
On  
On  
TF1  
TF6  
***04  
***05  
Euros  
ARD  
ZDF  
BBC1  
On  
FR6  
Tuner  
Tuner  
Tuner  
Tuner  
Tuner  
Tuner  
If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a timer  
recording overlap, you can select which will be given priority.  
To ensure the GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded, you can disable  
the timer recordings during data transmission. (23, left column,  
Night Download)  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
ESPRT  
ARD  
- - - -  
BBC1  
ARTE  
***06  
OK  
RETURN  
PAGE+  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the desired  
“Name” and press [1].  
You can also press [W X CH] to browse through the station  
Download data manually  
list.  
At the data transmission time, you can download the data manually  
from “Data Download” in the Setup menu (23).  
On/Off  
To select the stations to be displayed on the  
programme list.  
Only stations set to “On” are displayed in the GUIDE  
Plus+ list.  
Press [3, 4] to change the “On/Off” settings and  
press [OK].  
Reference To set the appropriate Reference manually  
If “No Data” appears in the GUIDE Plus+ list for a  
station, this station is either not supported by the  
GUIDE Plus+ data or a GUIDE Plus+ Reference could  
not be clearly assigned (“----” appears in the  
Reference field of this station). In this case, set the  
appropriate Reference manually.  
[Note]  
You can also manually assign the appropriate  
Reference even if a station name was not recognized  
(e.g. ***06).  
Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately  
one day before you can display the television programme list.  
The stations displayed in the television programme list are  
determined according to geographical areas.  
A station that is not registered in your area is not displayed in the  
television programme list even if a signal can be received.  
Once you have downloaded the programme list, reception of data  
is required regularly to update and maintain the programme list.  
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead during data download.  
During data download, the HDD rotates and will make operating  
sounds.  
Landscape  
Prog. Type  
All Types  
12.1 Wed  
12.1. Wed 15:05  
7th Heaven  
15:30  
15:05~16:05  
16:00  
16:30  
Time: 15:00  
Fliege-Die Talkshow  
Bianca-Wege...  
Ta... Abenteuer...  
ARD  
ZDF  
...  
Derrick Heute in ...  
Das Jugendgericht  
Das Familiengericht  
RTL  
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...  
SAT1  
***06  
PRO7  
MDR  
-24 Hr  
...  
7th Heaven  
Gilmore...  
No Data  
...  
Abenteuerurlaub  
+24 Hr  
Aktuell  
Prog. Type  
TIMER REC  
RETURN  
OPTION  
Display Mode  
PAGE-  
PAGE+  
GUIDE  
Press [3, 4] to change the “Reference” setting of the  
appropriate station and press [OK].  
[Note]  
The station names in the Reference list can deviate  
from the station list.  
[Note]  
Changes in the station list in the Setup menu (67) of your unit will  
cause all Editor settings to return to the initial condition.  
RQT8881  
22  
Host Channel  
Changing the settings  
You can change the basic settings for your GUIDE Plus+ list.  
It is not possible to receive GUIDE Plus+ data in all countries  
(below).  
1 Press [GUIDE].  
Check whether the right Host Channel has been input.  
2 Press [OPTION].  
List of Host Channel (As of end of February, 2007)  
Landscape  
Prog. Type  
All Types  
Display of the Host  
12.1 Wed  
12.1. Wed 15:05  
Country  
Host Channel  
Gilmore girls  
16:05~17:05  
Channel  
EUROS  
EUROS  
MTV  
15:30  
16:00  
16:30  
Time: 15:00  
Fliege-Die Talkshow  
Bianca-Wege...  
Ta... Abenteuer...  
ARD  
ZDF  
Germany  
Austria  
Eurosport  
Eurosport  
MTV  
...  
Derrick Heute in ...  
Das Jugendgericht  
Das Familiengericht  
RTL  
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...  
SAT1  
RTL2  
VOX  
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade  
...  
7th Heaven  
Yu-...  
Gilmore...  
Italy  
...  
Die Abschl... F
PRO7  
Setup  
Editor  
OK  
Netherlands  
Eurosport  
EUROS  
RETURN  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and  
To change the Host Channel manually left  
press [OK].  
[Note]  
12.1. Wed 15:05  
Which channels appear in the GUIDE Plus+ list depends on local  
reception conditions. Sub-optimum reception quality can result in  
missing or incomplete GUIDE Plus+ data.  
Setup  
Postal Code  
XXXXX  
EUROS  
Host Channel  
Data Download  
Night Download  
On  
OK  
RETURN  
4 Press [3, 4] to select an item and  
press [OK].  
Postal  
Code  
To enter the Postal Code  
The entry of the Postal Code is required to receive  
regional data.  
1
2
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] or the numbered buttons to  
enter your Postal Code and press [OK].  
Host  
Channel  
To change the Host Channel manually  
The GUIDE Plus+ System information is transferred  
via the Host Channel. The “Auto” setting is  
recommended. A Host Channel is then set by the  
system automatically.  
1
Press [3, 4] to select the desired station and  
press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
2
The setting of the Host Channel can take some time.  
To check the host channels of your country  
right column, Host Channel  
Data  
To download GUIDE Plus+ data manually  
Download Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The update can take approximately 2 hours.  
For further informations 22, GUIDE Plus+ data  
download  
Night  
Download  
To select the priority during midnight  
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM  
every day. It takes approximately 2 hours to complete  
data download.  
If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a  
timer recording overlap, you can select which will be  
given priority.  
On: Data Download  
Timer recording does not start or is interrupted for  
data download.  
Off: Timer programming  
GUIDE Plus+ data will not be downloaded.  
After recording finishes, we recommend you to  
change this setting to “On”.  
Press [  
2
,
1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].  
[Note]  
Existing information can be lost by changing the Postal Code or  
Host Channel.  
Entry of the wrong Postal Code or Host channel can lead to the  
receipt of wrong or no data.  
To change the settings, release the unit from recording standby  
(33).  
RQT8881  
23  
Set up to match your television and remote control  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”  
and press [1].  
DVD  
TV  
TV operation  
buttons  
Í
Setup  
Í
TV Aspect  
16:9  
Off  
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
Progressive  
AV  
TV System  
HDMI Settings  
PAL  
Tuning  
PAGE  
CH  
Disc  
2 3  
4 5 6  
AV1 Output  
Picture  
Video  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
AV2 Settnigs  
Sound  
Display  
TAB  
RETURN  
SELECT  
OK  
ShowView  
Connection  
Others  
8 9  
7
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Progressive”  
and press [OK].  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
Setup  
Progressive  
EXIT  
I
On  
Off  
Tuning  
Disc  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
N
SELECT  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
OPTION  
RETURN  
Connection  
Others  
OK  
RETURN  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press  
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
[OK].  
Output becomes progressive.  
[Note]  
When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube) or  
a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is progressive  
compatible, progressive output can cause some flickering. Turn off  
“Progressive” if this occurs (45).  
Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an  
incompatible television.  
To enjoy progressive video  
There is no output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals if  
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1 (without  
component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)” (65).  
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma television  
or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan (81).  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
To exit the screen  
FUNCTION MENU  
Press [EXIT].  
HDD  
Remain 70:00 SP  
Playback  
Recording  
Delete  
Copy  
To Others  
OK  
Television operation  
RETURN  
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn  
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the  
television channel and change the television volume.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
and press [OK].  
DVD  
TV  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and  
Í
Í
Volume  
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
Turn TV on/off  
Input select  
press [OK].  
SELECT  
AV  
Channel  
Select  
PAGE  
CH  
Setup  
Manual Tuning  
2 3  
1
Auto-Setup Restart  
4 5 6  
Tuning  
Download from TV  
Disc  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
SELECT  
TAB  
1
Point the remote control at the television  
Connection  
Others  
RETURN  
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code  
with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
01:  
[0] [1]  
10:  
[1] [0]  
RQT8881  
24  
Manufacturer and Code No.  
When other Panasonic products  
respond to this remote control  
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote  
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products  
close together.  
Brand  
Panasonic  
AIWA  
Code  
01/02/03/04  
35  
Brand  
Code  
05/28  
METZ  
MITSUBISHI  
MIVAR  
05/19/20/47  
AKAI  
27/30  
24  
36  
33  
BEJING  
BEKO  
33  
NEC  
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.  
05/71/72/73/ NOBLEX  
74  
BENQ  
58/59  
NOKIA  
25/26/27/  
60/61  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
BP  
09  
NORDMENDE  
OLEVIA  
10  
BRANDT  
BUSH  
10/15  
05  
45  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
ONWA  
30/39/70  
05  
and press [OK].  
CENTREX  
CHANGHONG  
CURTIS  
DAEWOO  
DESMET  
DUAL  
66  
ORION  
69  
PEONY  
46/69  
41/48/64  
05/06/46  
05  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and  
05  
PHILCO  
PHILIPS  
PHONOLA  
PIONEER  
PROVIEW  
PYE  
press [OK].  
64/65  
05  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and  
05  
37/38  
52  
press [1].  
ELEMIS  
FERGUSON  
FINLUX  
FISHER  
FUJITSU  
FUNAI  
05  
10/34  
61  
05  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Remote  
RADIOLA  
SABA  
05  
Control” and press [OK].  
21  
10  
53  
SALORA  
SAMSUNG  
26  
6 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD  
63/67  
32/42/43/  
65/68  
1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”) and press  
[OK].  
GOLDSTAR  
GOODMANS  
GRADIENTE  
GRUNDIG  
05/50/51  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
05  
05  
36  
09  
21/54/55/56  
05/29/30  
Remote Control  
Setup  
SCHNEIDER  
SEG  
Press “” and “OK” together  
for more than 5 seconds on the remote  
control.  
05/69/75/  
76/77/78  
Tuning  
Disc  
Picture  
HIKONA  
HITACHI  
52  
SELECO  
05/25  
18  
05/22/23/40/ SHARP  
41  
To change the code on the remote control  
INNO HIT  
IRRADIO  
ITT  
05  
30  
25  
49  
SIEMENS  
SINUDYNE  
SONY  
09  
05  
08  
7 While pressing [OK], press and hold  
the numbered button ([1], [2] or [3]) for  
more than 5 seconds.  
JINGXING  
TCL  
31/33/66/  
67/69  
8 Press [OK].  
JVC  
17/30/39/70  
TELEFUNKEN  
10/11/12/  
13/14  
KDS  
52  
TEVION  
52  
When the following indicator appears on the  
KOLIN  
KONKA  
LG  
45  
TEX ONDA  
THOMSON  
TOSHIBA  
52  
unit’s display  
62  
10/15/44  
16/57  
05  
The unit’s remote control code  
05/50/51  
07/46  
LOEWE  
WHITE  
WESTINGHOUSE  
MAG  
52  
YAMAHA  
18/41  
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s  
(step 7).  
2 Test by turning on the television and  
changing channels.  
[Note]  
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main  
unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1  
(step 7).  
Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows  
correct operation.  
If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for  
your television does not allow control of your television, this  
remote control is not compatible with your television.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
[Note]  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the  
one that allows correct operation.  
RQT8881  
25  
Recording television programmes  
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.  
2
REC  
OPEN/CLOSE  
To select with the numbered buttons:  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [5]  
3
5
15:  
[1] [5]  
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
4 Press [REC MODE] to select the  
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).  
1
PAGE  
CH  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
3
ShowView  
Remaining time  
8 9  
7
on the disc  
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):  
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the  
Setup menu (64).  
;
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
5 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.  
I
REC  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on  
disc. Data will not be overwritten.  
You cannot change the channel or recording mode during  
recording.  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OK  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
You can record while the unit is in standby for timer  
recording, but once the time for the timer recording to begin  
is reached, any recording taking place will stop and the timer  
recording will begin.  
[HDD] [RAM] When “Rec for High Speed Copy ”is set to “Off”  
(63), you can change the audio being received by  
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (Does not affect the  
recording of audio.)  
5
4
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
AUDIO  
See also “Important notes for recording” (8).  
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of  
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to record.  
[RAM] It is not possible to record continuously from one side of a  
double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and  
turn it over.  
[+RW] You can create Top Menu using “Create Top Menu” (60).  
Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,  
create the menu again.  
To pause recording  
Press [;].  
Press again to restart recording.  
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.  
(Title is not split into separate titles.)  
[HDD]  
You can record up to 500 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording  
for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.  
[+R] [+RW]  
You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.  
From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to  
complete recording management information after recording  
finishes.  
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R  
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary to  
finalise them (60).  
Preparation  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit  
the connections to this unit.  
Turn on this unit.  
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
HDD or DVD drive.  
If a station broadcasts Teletext information  
The unit automatically records the programme’s and station’s name  
if the station’s Title Page is correctly set (67).  
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.  
2
If you selected the DVD drive  
[Note]  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main  
The unit may take some time in retrieving titles (up to 30 minutes)  
and may fail in some cases.  
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.  
Press the button again to close the tray.  
When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the  
disc from the cartridge.  
Quick Start (66)  
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording & EPG Display  
(When connecting to TV using 21-pin Scart, Component Video,  
Video or S Video terminals)  
From the power on, recording on DVD-RAM and HDD starts in  
about 1 second after the REC button is pressed. If the GUIDE  
button is pressed while the unit is off, the Electronic Program  
Guide (EPG) displays in less than 1 second. (Quick Start Mode)  
Cartridge disc  
Insert label-up with the  
arrow facing in.  
Insert label-up.  
“Quick Start” is set to “On” at the time of purchase.  
Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it may  
take time to display the screen.  
Insert fully.  
Automatic drive select function  
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge  
set to “PROTECT” (58, Cartridge-protection)]  
[DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]  
If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it  
automatically switches to the DVD drive when a disc is  
inserted.  
If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is  
automatically selected.  
[Note]  
Startup takes up to a minute when:  
You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-  
RAM.  
You want to make other operations.  
–The clock has not been set.  
RQT8881  
26  
Recording modes and approximate recording times  
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.  
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)  
DVD-RAM  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
+R  
HDD  
(160 GB)  
DVD-R DL§3  
(8.5 GB)  
+R DL§3  
(8.5 GB)  
Recording Mode  
Single-sided  
Double-sided§1  
(9.4 GB)  
+RW  
(4.7 GB)  
(4.7 GB)  
XP (High picture  
quality recording  
mode)  
36 hours  
70 hours  
1 hour  
2 hours  
4 hours  
1 hour  
1 hour 45 min.  
1 hour 45 min.  
SP (Standard  
recording mode)  
2 hours  
4 hours  
2 hours  
4 hours  
3 hours 35 min.  
7 hours 10 min.  
3 hours 35 min.  
7 hours 10 min.  
LP (Long  
recording mode)  
138 hours  
284 hours  
8 hours  
EP (Extra long  
8 hours  
16 hours  
8 hours  
14 hours 20 min.  
recording mode)§4 (212hours§2  
)
(6 hours§2  
)
(12 hours§2  
)
(6 hours§2  
)
(10 hours 45 min.§2  
)
FR (Flexible  
284 hours  
Recording  
maximum  
Mode)§4  
8 hours  
maximum for  
one side  
Approximately 9 hours  
with video quality  
equivalent to LP mode.  
8 hours  
maximum  
8 hours  
maximum  
14 hours 20 min.  
§1 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.  
§2 When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP (6 Hours)” in the Setup menu (63).  
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when using “EP (8 Hours)”.  
§3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.  
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode .  
When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode , you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R or +RW discs.  
§4  
[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.  
Use “EP (6 Hours)” mode if playback may be on other equipment.  
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)  
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.  
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 Hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with  
the best possible recording quality.  
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.  
When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.  
All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.  
Disc Insertion/Ejection  
When the format confirmation screen is displayed  
When removing a recorded disc  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or  
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format  
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.  
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc  
for play on other equipment.  
Finalise  
Finalise the disc so that is can be played  
on other DVD players.  
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible  
after finalising. This may take up to min.  
Format  
This disc is not formatted properly.  
Do you want to format the disc now ?  
Press the REC button to start finalise.  
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.  
The disc cannot be played on other  
DVD players without finalising.  
Yes  
No  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
To finalise the disc  
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
You cannot stop this process once you have started it.  
If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a  
disc name, select “Top Menu (60)”, “Auto-Play Select (60)” or  
“Disc Name (58)” in “DVD Management” before finalising.  
To format a disc  
“Deleting all the contents of a disc—Format” (59)  
To open the tray without disc finalisation  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.  
RQT8881  
27  
Recording television programmes  
Recording settings for High Speed  
Copy  
REC  
OPEN  
/
CLOSE  
When copying in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, set “Rec  
for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.  
1
¥ REC  
(The default setting is “On”.  
63)  
However, some restrictions apply:  
Refer to the “When recording a bilingual programme” and “About  
the aspect when recording a programme” for more information  
(8).  
DVD  
TV  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
PAGE  
CH  
[Note]  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
If you do not intend to copy titles in high speed mode to DVD-R,  
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, set  
“Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”.  
Numbered  
buttons  
ShowView  
8 9  
7
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
1
I
DIRECT  
NAVIGATOR  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OK  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
STATUS  
To specify a time to stop recording—  
One Touch Recording  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
During recording  
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording  
time.  
You can specify up to 4 hours later.  
The unit display changes as shown below.  
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00  
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00  
,"" OFF 3:00 ,}  
This does not work during timer recordings (30) or while using  
Flexible Recording (29).  
The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is  
reached.  
To cancel  
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter  
appears.  
The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording  
continues.  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
RQT8881  
28  
5
When you want to start recording  
Flexible Recording  
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
and press [OK].  
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording  
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR  
mode.  
Recording starts.  
XP  
SP  
LP  
EP  
All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in  
the display.  
Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these  
kinds of situations.  
To exit the screen without recording  
e.g., HDD  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
Press [RETURN].  
When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an  
appropriate recording mode difficult  
When you want to record a long programme with the best picture  
quality possible  
HDD  
REC 0:59  
ARD  
M 1 / M 2  
L R  
To stop recording partway  
Press [].  
Remaining  
time of  
recording  
To show the remaining time  
Press [STATUS].  
[HDD]  
When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be  
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly  
You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording  
mode when copying, to fit the disc space  
Playing while you are recording  
[HDD] [RAM]  
e.g., Recording a 90 minute programme to disc  
Playing from the beginning of the title you are  
recording—Chasing playback  
If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.  
If you try to record a 90 minute  
programme in XP mode, only the  
first 60 minutes will fit on the disc  
and the 30 minute balance will not  
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.  
There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
get recorded.  
To stop play  
Another disc is necessary.  
Press [].  
If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.  
To stop recording  
2 seconds after play stops, press [].  
However there will be 30 minutes  
remaining disc space.  
To stop timer recording  
2 seconds after play stops  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
1
2
Press [].  
If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc  
perfectly.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].  
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—  
Simultaneous rec and play  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press  
[DRIVE SELECT].  
Necessary space for recording  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during  
recording.  
Preparation  
Select the channel or the external input to record.  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title  
1
While stopped  
and press [OK].  
There is no sound output while searching forward or  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
backward.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
To stop play  
Press [].  
and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible Rec”  
To exit the Direct Navigator screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
and press [OK].  
Flexible Rec  
Maximum recording time  
This is the maximum recording  
time in EP (8 Hours) mode.  
Record in FR mode.  
To stop recording  
After play stops  
Maximum rec. time 8 Hour 00 Min.  
Set rec. time  
8 Hour 00 Min.  
Start  
Cancel  
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.  
If the recording is on the other drive  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.  
Press [].  
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and  
3
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the  
recording time.  
To stop timer recording  
After play stops  
You can also set the recording time with the numbered  
buttons.  
You cannot record more than 8 hours.  
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.  
If the recording is on the other drive  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.  
Press [].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].  
3
4
[Note]  
RQT8881  
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be  
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).  
29  
Timer recording  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make  
timer recordings  
REC  
OPEN/CLOSE  
You can perform timer recordings by simply selecting the desired  
programme from the television programme list.  
X
CH  
W
¥ REC  
Before using the GUIDE Plus+ system  
The television programme list is not displayed immediately after  
purchasing this unit.  
DVD  
TV  
Í
You must complete initial setup for the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
Í
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
Refer to “GUIDE Plus+ system settings” (21) for more  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
information.  
PAGE  
CH  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
W X  
CH  
Numbered  
buttons  
1 Press [GUIDE].  
ShowView  
8 9  
7
ShowView  
Landscape  
Prog. Type  
All Types  
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
15.7. Tue  
0
SELECT  
15.7. Tue 15:05  
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE, ¢  
Gilmore girls  
16:05~17:05  
SKIP  
SLOW/SSEARCH  
15:30  
16:00  
16:30  
Time: 15:00  
INPUT SELECT  
;
Fliege-Die Talkshow  
Bianca-Wege...  
Ta... Abenteuer...  
ARD  
ZDF  
RTL  
SAT1  
RTL2  
VOX  
PRO7  
-24 Hr  
...  
Derrick Heute in ...  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
Das Jugendgericht  
Das Familiengericht  
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...  
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade  
Yu-...  
EXIT  
I
Gilmore...  
...  
7th Heaven  
GUIDE  
S.O.S Style & ...  
Die Abschl... Freunde...  
+24 Hr  
Prog. Type  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
TIMER REC  
RETURN  
Info  
GUIDE  
OPTION  
Display Mode  
PAGE-  
PAGE+  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
“Blue”  
OPTION  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
“Red”  
“Green”  
¥ REC  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
programme.  
EXT LINK  
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
3 Press [OK].  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
REC MODE  
Timer  
Remain  
Recording  
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE  
The default setting  
for Germany and  
Austria is “ON”.  
HDD  
DVD  
VPS  
Name  
Date  
Start  
16:00  
Stop  
17:00  
Mode  
PDC  
1
ARD 15. 7. TUE  
HDD  
SP  
ON  
Programme Name  
Fliege-Die Talkshow  
See also “Important notes for recording” (8).  
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of  
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to  
record.  
Confirm the programme and make corrections if necessary  
using [3, 4, 2, 1] (32, right column, step 3).  
4 Press [OK].  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is displayed  
below.  
You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.  
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)  
Gilmore girls  
15:30  
16:00  
16:30  
0
.
Timer icon  
Fliege-Die Talkshow  
Abenteuer...  
Preparation  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit  
the connections to this unit.  
Bianca-Wege...  
errick Heute in ...  
If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording  
(26).  
Make sure that the clock settings are correct (69).  
F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording  
standby has been activated.  
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE  
VPS  
HDD  
Drive  
Stop  
20:00  
Mode PDC space  
DVD  
Check to make sure “OK”  
is displayed  
(33, Check, change or  
delete a programme).  
HDD  
SP OFF  
OK  
Programme  
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.  
[Note]  
If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (68), the GUIDE  
Plus+ system cannot be used.  
To cancel recording when recording has already  
begun (33)  
To release the unit from recording standby  
(33)  
Notes on timer recording (33)  
RQT8881  
30  
Operations in the GUIDE Plus+ system  
Basic operations  
Selecting the programme from the desired category  
The Programme Type function lets you display a GUIDE Plus+ list  
sorted by main category (e.g. Movies, Sport). Each main category  
will contain individual sub categories. The GUIDE Plus+ list for the  
selected main category only appears in the Portrait view.  
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and  
Portrait view.  
Landscape view  
Landscape  
15.7. Tue  
Prog. Type  
All Types  
15.7. Tue 15:05  
Gilmore girls  
16:05~17:05  
15:30  
16:00  
16:30  
Time: 15:00  
1 Press the “Blue” button to display the  
list of main categories.  
Fliege-Die Talkshow  
Bianca-Wege...  
Ta... Abenteuer...  
ARD  
ZDF  
RTL  
SAT1  
RTL2  
VOX  
PRO7  
-24 Hr  
...  
Derrick Heute in ...  
Das Jugendgericht  
Das Familiengericht  
Richterin Barbara Sa... Richter Alexander...  
Detektiv Duel M... Beyblade  
Yu-...  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired  
Gilmore...  
...  
7th Heaven  
S.O.S Style & ...  
Die Abschl... Freunde...  
+24 Hr  
main category.  
Prog. Type  
Portrait  
TIMER REC  
RETURN  
Prog. Type  
All Types  
Info  
GUIDE  
OPTION  
Display Mode  
PAGE-  
PAGE+  
15.7 Tue  
15.7. Tue 15:05  
All Types  
ARD  
RTL2  
ZDF RTL SAT1  
All  
V
Movies  
Sport  
15:00~15:15  
15:15~16:00  
16:00~17:00  
17:00~17:15  
17:15~17:47  
Tages
Action  
Abent
Animation  
Comedy  
Drama  
Romance  
Children  
Other  
Fliegew  
Tagesn
Brisan
Sci Fi  
17:47~17:49  
17:49~18:20  
18:20~18:50  
Tages
Thriller  
Verbo
Marienhof  
Portrait view  
Adventure  
Portrait  
15.7 Tue  
Prog. Type  
All Types  
15.7. Tue 15:05  
ARD  
RTL2  
ZDF RTL SAT1  
VOX PRO7  
Prog. Type  
OK  
15:00~15:15  
15:15~16:00  
16:00~17:00  
17:00~17:15  
17:15~17:47  
Tagesschau  
Abenteuer Wildnis  
RETURN  
Fliege-Die Talkshow  
Tagesschau um fünf  
Brisant  
The sub menu for the selected main category appears.  
Example: Press [3, 4] to select the main category Movies.  
The sub category with several movie categories appears  
(e.g. All Types, Action, Animation, Comedy, Drama,  
Romance, Sci Fi, Thriller, Adventure).  
17:47~17:49  
17:49~18:20  
18:20~18:50  
Tagesschau  
Verbotene Liebe  
Marienhof  
+24 Hr  
-24 Hr  
Prog. Type  
TIMER REC  
RETURN  
OPTION  
PAGE-  
PAGE+  
Display Mode  
GUIDE  
3 Press [2] to go to the sub category  
menu.  
To change stations  
Landscape view  
4 Press [3, 4] to make your selection.  
1
Press [2] until the station list is  
highlighted.  
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select a station.  
5 Press [OK].  
To view the current programme in the  
preview screen:  
Press the “Red” button.  
Portrait  
Action  
Prog. Type  
Movies  
(e.g., Action)  
12.1. Wed 15:05  
ARD  
RTL2  
ZDF RTL SAT1  
VOX PRO7  
To see the full-screen view of the  
current programme:  
12. 1. Wed: 20:00~21:30 The fast and the fury  
Ronin  
21:30~23:00  
23:00~01:15  
Press [OK].  
Noch 60 Sekunden  
Der Sturm  
13. 1. Thu: 19:15~21:00  
Press [GUIDE] to return to the Landscape  
view.  
21:00~22:30 Speed 2  
Mission Impossible  
14. 1. Fri: 22:30~23:00  
Portrait view  
23:00~01:30 Volcano  
Prog. Type  
1
Press [3] until the station list is  
highlighted.  
TIMER REC  
RETURN  
Info  
OPTION  
PAGE-  
PAGE+  
2
3
Press [2, 1] to select a station.  
To view the current programme in the  
preview screen:  
A list appears with all programmes of the selected main  
category and the selected sub category.  
Press the “Red” button.  
To see the full-screen view of the  
current programme:  
6 Press [3, 4] to go through the GUIDE  
Plus+ list.  
Press [OK].  
If you want to change the station, press [3] until the station  
list is highlighted and then press [2, 1].  
The GUIDE Plus+ list appears for the selected categories for  
this station.  
Press [GUIDE] to return to the Portrait  
view.  
To view a  
programme for  
another day  
Jump ahead 24 hours  
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead  
by one day.  
Jump back 24 hours  
Press the “Red” button.  
You can only jump back to the current  
date.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
To navigate within  
the GUIDE Plus+ list.  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1]  
Only current and future programmes are  
shown.  
To browse through  
Press [W X CH].  
the GUIDE Plus+ list.  
To see programme  
information  
(Programmes with the  
Additional information (programme name,  
programme duration, broadcast time, short  
description) is available for these  
programmes.  
symbol)  
Press [ ] to show and hide the  
information.  
RQT8881  
31  
Timer recording  
Refer to the control reference on page 30.  
Manually programming timer  
recordings  
Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer  
recordings  
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].  
Entering SHOWVIEW numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You  
can find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers or magazines.  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
Timer  
Remain  
Recording  
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE  
VPS  
HDD  
Start Stop DVD Mode PDC space  
Drive  
No. Name  
01  
Date  
15. 7. TUE  
1 Press [ShowView].  
20:00 HDD  
OFF  
SP  
19:00  
OK  
ARD  
New Timer Programme  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
ShowView  
Record  
Remain  
12:53:00 15. 7. TUE  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer  
Programme” and press [OK].  
Input ShowView Number 0-9, and press OK.  
3 Press [1] to move through the items  
2 Press the numbered buttons to enter  
and change the items with [3, 4].  
the SHOWVIEW number.  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
Timer  
Remain  
Recording  
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.  
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE  
HDD  
DVD  
VPS  
3 Press [OK].  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
Name  
Date  
Start  
22:00  
Stop  
22:30  
Mode  
PDC  
1
ARD 15. 7. TUE  
HDD SP  
OFF  
Timer  
Remain  
Recording  
Programme Name  
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE  
HDD  
DVD  
VPS  
Name  
Date  
Start  
16:00  
Stop  
17:00  
Mode  
PDC  
Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and  
Stop (Finish time) in 30-minute increments.  
You can also set Name (Programme position/TV Station  
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with  
the numbered buttons.  
1
ARD 15. 7. TUE  
HDD  
SP  
OFF  
Programme Name  
Confirm the programme and make corrections if necessary  
using [3, 4, 2, 1] (right column, step 3).  
When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set  
timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme  
position. After you have entered the information of a TV  
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.  
Date  
[. Date:  
Current date up to one month later minus  
one day  
l
l
l
;:  
Daily timer: SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI  
;:  
a. Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT  
4 Press [OK].  
You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording  
drive.  
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough  
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the  
“HDD” (34, Relief Recording).  
You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording  
mode.  
VPS/PDC (34)  
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is displayed  
below.  
No. Name  
Timer icon  
01  
ARD  
ON!)OFF (– – –)  
If the broadcasting station is not transmitting VPS/PDC  
signals, “jjj” appears in the menu for timer programming  
under “VPS/PDC”.  
F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording  
standby has been activated.  
[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (34)  
ON!)OFF  
Programme Name  
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press [OK].  
(57, Entering text)  
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE  
VPS  
HDD  
Drive  
Stop  
20:00  
Programme  
Mode PDC space  
SP OFF  
DVD  
Check to make sure “OK”  
HDD  
OK  
is displayed (33).  
4 Press [OK].  
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is displayed  
below.  
Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.  
To set timer programme when VPS/PDC is “ON”  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “VPS/PDC” and press [3, 4] to  
select “ON” in step 3 (above).  
If a programme listed in a newspaper or magazine has two  
SHOWVIEW numbers, use the SHOWVIEW number for VPS/PDC.  
No. Name  
Timer icon  
01  
ARD  
F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording  
standby has been activated.  
ARD  
ZDF  
12.10 Lizzie McGuire 1-104-525  
12.30 Dunya & Desie (15) 1-902  
(VPS 12.35 = 858-728)  
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE  
13.00 World News  
34-273  
VPS  
HDD  
Drive  
Stop  
20:00  
Programme  
Mode PDC space  
DVD  
VPS/PDC numbers  
HDD  
Check to make sure “OK”  
is displayed (33).  
SP OFF  
OK  
[Note]  
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.  
VPS/PDC will activate when this unit is set to standby mode. While  
this unit is on, recording starts and finishes at times you set initially.  
To cancel recording when recording has already begun (33)  
To release the unit from recording standby (33)  
Notes on timer recording (33)  
RQT8881  
32  
To cancel recording when recording  
has already begun  
Check, change or delete a programme  
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer  
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].  
1
While the unit is on  
Press [PROG/CHECK].  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
recording drive and press [].  
Stop Recording  
Icons  
F
[
W
Timer recording standby is activated.  
This programme is currently recording.  
The times overlap those in another programme.  
Recording of the programme with the later start time  
starts when the earlier programme finishes recording.  
You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon  
disappears the next time the timer programme starts  
recording.  
Timer recording in progress.  
Stop this timer recording?  
It will be cancelled if you stop.  
Cancel  
Stop Recording  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop  
F
X
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.  
The programme was copy-protected so it was not  
recorded.  
The programme did not complete recording because  
the disc is dirty or some other reason.  
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording  
(34).  
Recording” and press [OK].  
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if  
you have set a weekly or daily timer recording, the recording  
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.  
To release the unit from recording  
standby  
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD  
(Displayed while recording.)  
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD  
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer  
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].  
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD  
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].  
1:58 SP  
Timer  
Remain  
Date  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE  
VPS  
Recording  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme  
HDD  
Start Stop DVD Mode PDC space  
Drive  
No. Name  
New Timer Programme  
and press the “Red” button.  
The timer icon “F” (right) disappears from the timer  
recording list.  
You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as  
even one timer icon “F” (right) remains in the timer  
recording list.  
Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording  
standby.  
Press OK to store new programme.  
OK  
RETURN  
Notes on timer recording  
Message displayed in the “Drive space” line  
Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is  
turned on/off.  
Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when  
playing.  
Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal  
speed mode (51).  
If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains  
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.  
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.  
If the unit is not put in the timer recording standby mode at the last  
10 minutes before the programmed timer recording starting time,  
the “F” flashes on the unit’s display.  
When you programme successive timer recordings to start  
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at  
the beginning of the later programmes.  
OK:  
Displayed if the recording can fit in the  
remaining space.  
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display  
will show until when recordings can be made (up  
to a maximum of one month from the present  
time) based on the time remaining on the disc.  
! :  
It may not be possible to record because:  
there is not enough space left  
the number of possible titles has reached its  
maximum.  
Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to  
the HDD.  
Programme  
Programme  
Not recorded  
To change a programme  
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (32,  
right column, step 3)  
Recorded  
Recorded  
To delete a programme  
(If the GUIDE Plus+ system is set)  
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¢].  
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM every day. It  
takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download. If you  
want to make timer recordings during this time, set “Night  
Download” in the GUIDE Plus+ system setup menu to “Off” (23).  
If the actual broadcasting times of timer recordings overlap  
[regardless of whether they are VPS/PDC (34) controlled], the  
recording that starts first always has priority, and the recording of  
the later programme will start only after the first timer recording has  
finished.  
You can also delete a programme with the following steps  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
To exit the timer recording list  
Press [PROG/CHECK].  
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer  
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.  
RQT8881  
33  
Timer recording  
Refer to the control reference on page 30.  
Auto Renewal Recording  
[HDD]  
Relief Recording  
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every  
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme  
over the old one.  
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily  
recording is selected.  
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough  
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If  
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when  
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be  
altered to the HDD.  
The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were relief-  
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].  
recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (36).  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme  
If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the  
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.  
Relief recording is not activated when recording the programme  
with VPS/PDC and it is extended so that it no longer fits on the  
disc.  
and press [OK].  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”  
column.  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press  
[OK].  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
Timer  
Remain  
Recording  
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE  
HDD  
DVD  
VPS  
RENEW  
ON  
Name  
Date  
SUN  
Start  
22:00  
Stop  
Mode  
SP  
PDC  
OFF  
1
ARD  
22:30 HDD  
Programme Name  
[Note]  
If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or  
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the  
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for  
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this  
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto  
Renewal Recording takes place.  
Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal  
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.  
When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may  
not be recorded completely.  
VPS/PDC function  
VPS (Video Programme System) or PDC (Programme Delivery Control) is a very convenient system which records exactly from beginning to end  
of the TV programmes set in timer recording, even if the actual broadcasting time differs from the scheduled time due to delayed start or extension  
of the programme duration. Also, if a programme is interrupted, for example, some special news is inserted, the recording will be paused  
automatically and resumed when the programme continues.  
When VPS/PDC recording  
Use VPS/PDC time for recording the TV programmes.  
If a programme listed in a newspaper or magazine has two SHOWVIEW numbers, use the  
SHOWVIEW number for VPS/PDC.  
VPS/PDC will activate when in this unit is set to standby mode. While this unit is on, recording  
starts and finishes at times you set initially.  
Set “VPS/PDC” to “OFF” when recording time is not VPS/PDC time.  
VPS/PDC recording is not performed when VPS/PDC time is incorrect, even if only by one  
minute. To find out VPS/PDC time, consult Teletext, a newspaper or magazine, or other source.  
If you made a timer recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system, the default setting for Germany and  
Austria is “ON”.  
To change “VPS/PDC” setting (32, right column, step 3)  
When the VPS/PDC signal drops out  
Depending on the signals sent from the TV stations, the VPS/PDC system may not work properly  
because the broadcast signal is weak. even when “VPS/PDC” has been set to “ON”.  
When a TV station does not transmit a Timer recording will be performed in the normal mode (without VPS/PDC) even if it was  
regular VPS/PDC signal.  
programmed for VPS/PDC.  
In this case, even if the timer recording is performed, the programmed timer recording will not be  
cancelled at that particular time but at 4 a.m. two days later.  
If the start times of scheduled  
Set “VPS/PDC” to “OFF” when programming a programme whose start time has been  
programmes listed in the newspaper or subsequently changed.  
magazine change at a later date.  
[Note]  
The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in some cases.  
For a successful timer recording  
In the following cases, set the start time for a few minutes earlier than the beginning and the finish time for a minutes past the end.  
When making a timer recording from a broadcasting station does not transmit VPS/PDC signals.  
When making a timer recording with VPS/PDC set to “OFF”.  
RQT8881  
34  
Recording broadcasts from external equipment  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
Linked timer recordings with external  
equipment (digital/satellite receiver) —  
EXT LINK  
See also “Important notes for recording” (8).  
To record programmes from digital/satellite receiver using timer  
programming  
Making timer recordings on the  
television  
(e.g., of digital broadcasts)  
Preparation  
Make sure you connect the AV2 input terminal of this unit to the  
Scart terminal of a VCR or a digital/satellite receiver with a 21-pin  
Scart cable (15).  
To make a timer recording with your television, connect to a  
television with a Q Link function (18) that you can use for setting  
timer recordings using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable (14).  
Set “AV2 Input” to match the connected equipment in the Setup  
menu (66).  
Set “Ext Link” to match the connected equipment in the Setup  
menu (66).  
1 Make timer programming on the TV.  
2 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
HDD or DVD drive.  
1 Make timer programming on the  
external equipment.  
If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc (26).  
3 Turn off this unit.  
The start and end of recording is controlled by the TV.  
2 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
HDD or DVD drive.  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc (26).  
[Note]  
3 Press [EXT LINK].  
When this unit is in timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby  
(“F” or “EXT-L” is shown on the unit’s display), recording from  
television does not start.  
The unit turns off and “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display to  
indicate timer recording standby has been activated.  
Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end  
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later  
timer recording are close to each other.  
To cancel the external control  
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer  
recording standby.  
In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to  
cancel the setting after recording is finished.  
[HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (47).  
[Note]  
This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the  
equipment’s operating instructions.  
The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in  
some cases.  
When “Ext Link” is set to “Ext Link 2”, this function does not work if  
the input signal is NTSC system.  
Recording from digital/satellite receiver  
or decoder  
Preparation  
Connect a digital/satellite receiver or decoder to this unit’s input  
When “AV2 Connection” is set to “Decoder”, EXT LINK is not  
available (66).  
Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end  
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later  
timer recording are close to each other.  
[HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (47).  
When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the  
unit’s display), The GUIDE Plus+ data cannot downloaded.  
While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, video  
picture is from the AV2 input terminal irrespective of “AV1 Output”  
setting (65).  
terminals (15).  
When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,  
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (68).  
This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC  
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded  
onto the HDD.)  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
1
While stopped  
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the  
input channel for the equipment you  
During EXT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is only  
available from the drive performing the recording.  
have connected.  
e.g.,If you have connected to AV2 input terminals, select “A2”.  
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the  
recording mode.  
3 Select the channel on the other  
equipment.  
4 Press [¥ REC].  
Recording starts.  
To skip unwanted parts  
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
RQT8881  
35  
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs  
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—  
Direct Navigator  
2
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
(This function does not work with finalised discs.)  
REC  
OPEN/CLOSE  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Thumbnail Display  
Table Display  
3
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
HDD  
Title View  
008  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
HDD  
Title View  
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title  
- - -  
007  
001  
002  
003  
004  
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30  
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15  
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00  
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05  
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10  
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25  
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30  
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00  
---  
1
PAGE  
CH  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
- - -  
ARD 11.10. SAT  
- - -  
2 3  
1
Rec time  
0:52(SP)  
- - -  
Numbered  
buttons  
4 5 6  
ShowView  
Previous  
Page 02/02  
Next  
Page 01/01  
8 9  
7
OK  
OK  
Previous  
Select  
OPTION  
Next  
Select  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
Switching the Direct Navigator appearance  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEEARCH  
1 Press [OPTION] while Thumbnail Display is displayed.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Table Display” and press [OK].  
The display appearance last used is saved even after the unit is  
turned off.  
:, 9  
6, 5  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
3
;
DIRECT  
NAVIGATOR,  
Top Menu”  
[HDD] To sort Title View for easy searching (Table Display only)  
This function is convenient when searching for one title to  
playback from many titles.  
I
2;, ;1  
OK  
1 Press [OPTION].  
3,4,2,1  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
If you select an item other than “No.”  
The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after playback of the  
selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)  
Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being  
played back.  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
OPTION  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
MANUAL SKIP  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
AUDIO  
TIME SLIP  
16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the  
following cases.  
If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, the sorted Title View will  
be cancelled.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press  
[OK].  
or longer)” recording mode.  
If you recorded to a +R or +RW.  
If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in the  
Setup menu (63).  
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
[HDD]  
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
However, if you recorded to the HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Rec for  
High Speed Copy” was set to “Off” in the Setup menu (63), the  
aspect will remain 16:9.  
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
5:  
15:  
115:  
[0] [0] [5]  
[0] [1] [5]  
[1] [1] [5]  
5:  
15:  
[0] [5]  
[1] [5]  
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to  
your television’s operating instructions.  
Preparation  
To show other pages  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit  
the connections to this unit.  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[OK]. (Thumbnail Display only)  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Turn on this unit.  
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
To exit the screen  
HDD or DVD drive.  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.  
It is possible to watch playback from one drive while  
recording on another (editing is not possible).  
Direct Navigator screen icons  
[
Currently recording.  
2
If you selected the DVD drive  
Title protected.  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main  
Title that was not recorded due to recording  
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)  
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.  
Press the button again to close the tray.  
Title cannot be played  
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is  
damaged etc.]  
t
When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the  
disc from the cartridge.  
Cartridge disc  
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD  
(34, Relief Recording)  
Insert label-up.  
Insert label-up with the  
arrow facing in.  
Title with “One time only recording” restriction  
(80, CPRM)  
Title recorded using a different encoding system  
(NTSC)  
(PAL)  
from that of the TV system currently selected on the  
unit.  
Insert fully.  
Automatic drive select function (26)  
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit  
(68).  
3 Press [1] (PLAY).  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.  
[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] and MP3  
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.  
DivX  
DivX Menu screen appears (40).  
When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the  
protect position (58), play automatically starts when  
inserted in the unit.  
RQT8881  
36  
When a menu screen appears on the television  
[DVD-V]  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK].  
Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.  
If “ENTER” appears on the screen, press [OK].  
[VCD]  
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [5]  
15:  
[1] [5]  
To return to the menu screen  
[DVD-V] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
You can also return to the menu screen with the following steps.  
1
2
Press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].  
[VCD] Press [RETURN].  
[Note]  
It is not possible to play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.  
Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.  
Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television screen  
and so on.  
The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating  
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.  
When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (68).  
Operations during play  
Press [].  
The stopped position is memorized.  
Stop  
Resume play function  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.  
Stopped position  
If [] is pressed several times, the position is cleared.  
The position is cleared if the tray is opened.  
[CD] [VCD] and MP3/DivX :The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.  
Press [;].  
Pause  
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
Press [6] or [5].  
The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
Search  
Audio is heard during first level search forward.  
[CD] and MP3 : Audio is heard during all levels of search.  
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of search.  
Depending on the disc, Search may not be possible.  
During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].  
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to play.  
Each press increases the number of skips.  
Skip  
DivX : Backward direction [:] only.  
Press the numbered buttons.  
Starting from a selected  
title  
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or track.  
[HDD]  
e.g., 5: [0] [0] [5]  
15: [0] [1] [5]  
MP3 and JPEG  
e.g., 5: [0] [0] [0] [5]  
15: [0] [0] [1] [5]  
Other discs  
Input a 2-digit number  
e.g., 5: [0] [5]  
15: [1] [5]  
This works only when stopped (screen saver is displayed on the television right)  
with some discs.  
[VCD] (with playback control)  
If you press the numbered buttons while stopped (the above screen saver is  
displayed on the television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play time appears on  
the unit’s display.)  
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).  
Play speed is quicker than normal.  
Quick View  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Press again to return to normal speed.  
RQT8881  
(Continued on the next page)  
37  
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs  
Refer to the control reference on page 36.  
Operations during play  
(continued)  
While paused, press [6] or [5].  
The speed increases up to 5 steps.  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
Slow-motion  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]  
[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.  
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]  
The unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes  
(excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).  
While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).  
Each press shows the next frame.  
Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
Frame-by-frame  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]  
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]  
[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.  
1 Press [TIME SLIP].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time  
Skipping the specified  
time (Time Slip)  
-
5 min  
This automatically  
disappears after  
approximately 5  
and press [OK].  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
Play skips the specified time.  
Each time you press [3, 4], the time  
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1 minute  
intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute  
intervals.)  
seconds. To show the  
screen again press  
[TIME SLIP] again.  
(This function does not work with  
finalised discs.)  
Press [MANUAL SKIP].  
Each time you press, play restarts approximately 30 seconds later.  
Manual Skip  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
(This function does not work with  
finalised discs.)  
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].  
Chapters are divided at the point pressed.  
Create Chapter  
(46, Title/Chapter)  
Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a chapter.  
Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK standby.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Changing audio during play  
Press [AUDIO].  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX  
LR>L>R  
[DVD-V]  
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the  
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack  
language (44, Soundtrack).  
^---------------}  
HDD  
PLAY  
1 ENG  
CꢀDigital 3/2.1ch  
Soundtrack  
e.g., English is selected.  
e.g., “L R” is selected  
L R  
[Note]  
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.  
When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.  
When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (64).  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting is “On” 63).  
RQT8881  
38  
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG)  
Regarding DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG)  
DivX  
[-R] [CD]  
Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended  
formats) and Joliet  
Playable  
discs  
[-R] [CD]  
This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the  
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.  
Operation may take time to complete when there are many files  
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not  
display or be playable.  
File  
format  
DivX  
Files must have the  
extension “.DIVX”, “.divx”,  
“.AVI” or “.avi”.  
English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.  
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.  
The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is  
displayed on a computer.  
Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files  
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you  
numbered them.  
Number  
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders  
of folders (including the root folder)  
Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 200 files  
Number  
of files  
Support  
version  
Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6) with  
standard playback of DivX media files.  
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.  
Video  
This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.  
Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.  
–Number of stream: Up to 1  
–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50  
–Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576  
–FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps  
Audio  
–Number of stream: Up to 8  
–Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3  
–Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch  
conversion.  
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not supported.  
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by  
making folders as shown below. However depending on how  
you create the disc (writing software), play may not be in the  
order you numbered the folders.  
Root  
Structure of MP3 folders  
(folder=group)  
001  
Prefix with 3-digit numbers  
in the order you want to play  
them.  
(file=track)  
001track.mp3  
002track.mp3  
003track.mp3  
MP3  
Playable  
discs  
[-R] [CD]  
002 group  
001track.mp3  
002track.mp3  
003track.mp3  
004track.mp3  
003 group  
File  
format  
MP3  
Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.  
001track.mp3  
002track.mp3  
003track.mp3  
Number  
Maximum number of folders (groups) recognizable:  
Order of play  
of folders 300 folders (groups)  
(groups)  
(including the root folder)  
Root  
Structures of still pictures  
Files inside a folder are displayed  
in the order they were updated or  
taken.  
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1  
3000 files (tracks)  
:
Number  
of files  
P0000001.jpg  
P0000002.jpg  
(tracks)  
002 Folder  
Bit rates  
32 kbps to 320 kbps  
P0000003.jpg  
P0000004.jpg  
P0000005.jpg  
Sampling 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz  
frequency  
When the highest level folders  
are “DCIM” folders, they are  
displayed first on the tree.  
003 Folder  
P0000006.jpg  
P0000007.jpg  
P0000008.jpg  
P0000009.jpg  
004 Folder  
ID3 tags  
not compatible  
If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,  
play may not be possible.  
P0000010.jpg  
P0000011.jpg  
P0000012.jpg  
Order of play  
Still pictures (JPEG§2  
)
Playable  
discs  
[-R] [CD]  
File  
format  
File format: JPEG  
Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.  
Number  
of pixels  
Between 34k34 and 6144k4096  
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)  
Number  
of  
folders§3  
Maximum number of folders recognizable:300 folders  
(including the root folder)  
Maximum number of files recognizable§1:3000 files  
not supported  
Number  
of files§3  
MOTION  
JPEG  
§1 Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG, DivX and  
other types of files is 4000.  
§2 It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.  
§3 When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not  
display or be playable.  
RQT8881  
39  
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG)  
Playing DivX discs  
[-R] [CD]  
DVD  
TV  
You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain DivX  
video contents that have been recorded on a computer.  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
DRIVE SELECT  
PAGE  
CH  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
ShowView  
8 9  
7
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
Folder1  
:
00025  
DivX Menu  
CD (DivX)  
SKIP  
SLOW/SSEARCH  
No.  
001  
Name of Title  
Tree  
:, 9  
ABC.avi  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
I
Page  
001/001  
Total Title : 001  
OK  
RETURN  
DIRECT  
NAVIGATOR  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
Files are treated as titles.  
3,4,2,1  
When the MP3 or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps  
1–4 in “To select file type” on the left column selecting “DivX”  
in step 4 to change the playback mode.  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OK  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
OPTION  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and  
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
STATUS  
press [OK].  
Play starts on the selected title.  
You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.  
Selecting file type to play  
[-R] [CD]  
You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3  
files, DivX video contents or still pictures that have been recorded on  
a computer.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [0] [5]  
15:  
[0] [1] [5]  
To stop playing  
Press [].  
The screen shown below is displayed when you insert a disc  
containing DivX video contents, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG).  
To show other pages  
Press [:, 9].  
e.g.,  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Play mode is set to DivX.  
To play another type of file,  
select the file type  
from ''Playback'' in FUNCTION MENU.  
[Note]  
Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from  
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to  
adjust the aspect through the TV.  
When playing the file displayed on the screen  
Press [OK].  
Successive play is not possible.  
Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD  
drive.  
When you want to play files other than the one displayed on the  
screen  
Follow the steps below.  
To select file type  
1 Press [RETURN].  
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
FUNCTION MENU  
Using the tree screen to find a folder  
1 While the file list is displayed  
CD(DivX/MP3/JPEG)  
Play Mode : DivX  
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display  
the tree screen.  
Playback  
Recording  
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.  
Copy  
To Others  
OK  
Folder  
DivX Menu  
CD (DivX)  
RETURN  
F
1/21  
12.02.2004  
Image001  
Image002  
Image003  
Image004  
Image005  
Image006  
Image007  
Image008  
Image009  
Image010  
DATA1  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press  
[OK].  
You cannot select  
folders that contain no  
compatible files.  
DATA2  
OK  
RETURN  
Playback  
Select file type.  
DivX  
MP3  
2 Press [  
3
,
4] to select a folder and press [OK].  
JPEG  
The file list for the folder appears.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select playback mode and press  
[OK].  
If “DivX” is selected: Go to “Playing DivX discs” step 2 in the right  
column.  
If “MP3” is selected: Go to “Playing MP3 discs” step 2  
on page 42.  
If “JPEG” is selected: Go to “Playing still pictures” step 2 on page  
42  
RQT8881  
40  
Regarding DivX VOD content  
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright  
protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first  
need to register the unit.  
Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content to  
enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit. For more  
Display the unit’s registration code.  
(66, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)  
DivX Registration  
Setup  
DivX (R) Video On Demand  
Tuning  
8 alphanumeric  
characters  
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX  
Disc  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
Connection  
Others  
OK  
RETURN  
After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another  
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not  
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you  
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the  
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content  
that you purchased using the previous code.  
If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code  
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this  
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)  
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of  
times  
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.  
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is  
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of  
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired” is displayed.)  
When playing this content  
The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if  
–you press [Í DVD].  
–you press [].  
–you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content  
or the start of the content being played.  
–timer recording starts on the HDD.  
–you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.  
Resume functions do not work.  
RQT8881  
41  
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG)  
Refer to the control reference on page 40.  
Playing still pictures  
[-R] [CD]  
You can playback still pictures recorded onto a DVD-R or CD-R/  
CD-RW on a PC.  
You cannot playback still pictures while recording or copying.  
Playing MP3 discs  
[-R] [CD]  
You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3  
files that have been recorded on a computer.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Selected group  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
No.  
Group  
My favorite  
MP3 Menu  
1
Total  
1
:
G: Group No.  
G
1
JPEG Menu  
CD(JPEG)  
Picture (JPEG) View  
Picture (JPEG) View  
screen  
Track  
Tree  
T
1
T: Track No. in the group  
TOTAL: Track No./Total  
tracks in all groups  
001 Both Ends Freezing  
TOTAL  
Folder  
103__DVD  
2
3
4
5
6
002 Lady Starfish  
003 Life on Jupiter  
004 Metal Glue  
005 Paint It Yellow  
006 Pyjamamama  
007 Shrimps from Mars  
008 Starperson  
1/111  
0001  
0005  
0009  
0002  
0003  
0007  
----  
0004  
0008  
----  
Number  
0006  
----  
0
9
Prev.  
Next  
7
8
SELECT  
OK  
9
10  
009 Velvet Cuppermine  
010 Ziggy Starfish  
Page 001/001  
Previous  
Next  
OK  
RETURN  
Page 001/024  
RETURN  
When the DivX or MP3 Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4  
in “To select file type” on page 40 selecting “JPEG” in step 4 to  
change the playback mode.  
Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.  
When the DivX or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4 in  
To select file type” on page 40 selecting “MP3” in step 4 to change  
the playback mode.  
Direct Navigator screen icons  
Picture and folder protected.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and  
press [OK].  
Play starts on the selected track.  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[OK].  
0” indicates the track currently playing.  
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [0] [0] [5]  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
15:  
[0] [0] [1] [5]  
To select the still pictures in another folder 43  
To stop playing  
Press [].  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still  
To show other pages  
Press [:, 9].  
picture and press [OK].  
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
5:  
[0] [0] [0] [5]  
115: [0] [1] [1] [5]  
15: [0] [0] [1] [5]  
1115: [1] [1] [1] [5]  
Using the tree screen to find a group  
1 While the file list is displayed  
Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.  
Useful functions during still picture play (43)  
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display  
the tree screen.  
To return to the Picture (JPEG) View screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Selected group No. /Total groups  
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
MP3 Menu  
Tree  
G
8
MP3 music  
G
7/25  
T
14  
001 My favorite  
TOTAL  
001 Brazilian pops  
002 Chinese pops  
003 Czech pops  
004 Hungarian pops  
005 Liner notes  
40/111  
Number  
You cannot select groups  
that contain no compatible  
files.  
0
9
006 Japanese pops  
007 Mexican pops  
008 Philippine pops  
009 Swedish pops  
001 Momoko  
002 Standard number  
001 Piano solo  
SELECT  
OK  
RETURN  
002 Vocal  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press  
[OK].  
The file list for the group appears.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
RQT8881  
42  
Useful functions during still picture play  
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.  
Start Slide  
Show  
While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OPTION].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [OK].  
Start Slide Show  
Slide Interval  
Slide Interval  
Rotate  
To change the display interval  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Interval” in step 2 and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (0–30 seconds) and press [OK].  
While playing  
1 Press [OPTION].  
Rotate RIGHT  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].  
Rotation information will not be stored.  
Rotate LEFT  
OK  
RETURN  
While playing  
1 Press [OPTION].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].  
To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press [OK].  
When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.  
Zoom in  
Zoom out  
Rotate RIGHT  
Rotate LEFT  
Zoom in  
OK  
RETURN  
The enlargement information will not be stored.  
The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than 640 a 480 pixels.  
While playing  
Properties  
18:53:50 11.10.  
Press [STATUS] twice.  
Date  
1. 1. 2005  
No.  
3 / 9  
To exit the picture properties screen  
Press [STATUS].  
Shooting date  
To select the still pictures in another folder  
1 While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].  
JPEG Menu  
CD(JPEG)  
JPEG Menu  
CD(JPEG)  
Picture (JPEG) View  
Folder  
Folder  
103__DVD  
F
1/3  
0001  
----  
----  
0002  
----  
----  
0003  
----  
0004  
----  
021216_0026  
103_DVD  
104_DVD  
105_DVD  
----  
----  
Page 001/001  
Previous  
Next  
OK  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
RQT8881  
43  
Using on-screen menus/Status message  
Disc menu—Setting the disc content  
DVD  
Soundtrack§  
TV  
Í
Í
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
The disc’s audio attributes appear.  
[DVD-V]  
Select the audio and language (below, Audio attribute,  
Language).  
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
PAGE  
CH  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
[VCD] (SVCD) and DivX  
ShowView  
Select the soundtrack number.  
Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one  
audio type.  
8 9  
7
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
Subtitle§  
[DVD-V]  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (below,  
Language).  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only  
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)  
Turn the subtitle on/off.  
I
OK  
3,4,2,1  
Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.  
[VCD] (SVCD) and DivX  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.  
Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple  
subtitles.  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
Angle§ [DVD-V]  
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
STATUS  
DISPLAY  
Change the number to select an angle.  
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX  
38, Changing audio during play  
Source Select (DivX)  
Automatic: The constructing method of the DivX contents  
is automatically distinguished and output.  
Interlace: Select when the disc contents were recorded  
using interlace.  
Using on-screen menus  
Progressive: Select when the disc contents were recorded  
using progressive.  
Common procedures  
PBC (Playback control 81) [VCD]  
1 Press [DISPLAY].  
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.  
Disc  
CꢀDigital 2/0 ch  
1
Soundtrack  
Subtitle  
Play  
§ With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using the  
menus (37) on the disc.  
Off  
Picture  
Sound  
Other  
L R  
Audio channel  
The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot  
change when there is no recording.  
Menu  
Item  
Setting  
Audio attribute  
Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,  
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you  
cannot select or change.  
LPCM/ÎDigital/DTS/MPEG:  
k (kHz):  
b (bit):  
Signal type  
Sampling frequency  
Number of bits  
ch (channel):  
Number of channels  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and  
Language  
press [1].  
ENG: English  
FRA: French  
DEU: German  
ITA: Italian  
ESP: Spanish  
NLD: Dutch  
DAN: Danish  
THA: Thai  
POR: Portuguese  
RUS: Russian  
JPN: Japanese  
CHI: Chinese  
KOR: Korean  
POL: Polish  
CES: Czech  
SLK: Slovak  
HUN: Hungarian  
FIN: Finnish  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and  
press [1].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.  
SVE: Swedish  
NOR: Norwegian  
MAL: Malay  
¢:  
Others  
Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].  
VIE: Vietnamese  
To clear the on-screen menus  
Press [DISPLAY].  
RQT8881  
44  
Play menu—Change the play sequence  
Sound menu—Change the sound effect  
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.  
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that  
can be selected will differ.  
V.S.S.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
(Dolby Digital, MPEG, 2-channel or over only)  
Repeat Play  
Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers  
only.  
Turn V.S.S. off if it causes distortion. (Check the surround  
function on the connected equipment.)  
V.S.S. does not work for bilingual recordings.  
All  
Chapter  
[CD][VCD]  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
MP3  
Group  
PL (Playlist)  
Title  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
[CD][VCD] and MP3  
Dialog Enhancer  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
and DivX  
Track  
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)  
Select “Off” to cancel.  
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue  
easier to hear.  
Picture menu—Change the picture quality  
Other menu—Change the display position  
Playback NR  
Position  
Reduces noise and picture degradation.  
Progressive§ (81)  
1–5: The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu  
moves.  
Select “On” to enable progressive output.  
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.  
Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (above) is set to “On”.]  
Status messages  
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit  
the type of title being played (80, Film and video).  
Press [STATUS].  
When the output signal is PAL  
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)  
The display changes each time you press the button.  
Auto:  
Video:  
Film:  
Automatically detects the film and video  
content, and appropriately converts it.  
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is  
distorted.  
Select this if the edges of  
the film content appear  
Selected drive/type of disc  
HDD  
The remaining time appears here while  
REC  
PLAY  
stopped.  
Recording or play status/input channel  
STEREO  
L R  
TV audio type being received (below)  
Selected audio type  
jagged or rough when  
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator  
DVD REC  
“Auto” is selected.  
However, if the video  
content is distorted as  
shown in the illustration to the right, then select  
“Auto”.  
Title number and elapsed time during play/  
Recording mode  
Available recording time and  
recording mode  
Date and time  
When the output signal is NTSC  
Auto1  
(normal):  
Auto2:  
Automatically detects the film and video  
Remain  
18:53:50 11.10.  
13:50 XP  
content, and appropriately converts it.  
In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects  
film contents with different frame rates and  
appropriately converts it.  
T1 0:05.14 XP T2 0:00.10 XP  
Title number and elapsed time during  
recording/Recording mode  
Video:  
Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and  
the content is distorted.  
AV-in NR (Only when AV1, AV2, AV3 or DV is selected)  
No display  
Reduces video tape noise while copying.  
TV audio type  
STEREO:STEREO stereo broadcast  
M 1/M 2: Bilingual dual-sound broadcast  
M 1: Monaural broadcast  
Automatic: Noise reduction only works on picture input from  
a video tape.  
On:  
Noise reduction works for input video.  
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input  
signal as it is.  
Off:  
§ Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu  
(24).  
RQT8881  
45  
Editing titles/chapters  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
1
During play or while stopped  
AV  
DRIVE SELECT  
PAGE  
CH  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.  
ShowView  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
Title View  
Title View screen  
8 9  
7
HDD  
- - -  
007  
008  
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SSEARCCH  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
- - -  
ARD 11.10. SAT  
- - -  
:, 9  
- - -  
;
1
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
Previous  
Next  
Page 02/02  
OK  
Select Previous  
Next  
OPTION  
RETURN  
I
DIRECT  
NAVIGATOR  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and  
press [OK].  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Multiple editing  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
OPTION  
REC  
RETURN  
RETURN  
OPTION  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
(You cannot edit finalised discs.)  
3
4
Press [OPTION].  
Title/Chapter  
Press [3,  
4] to select the operation  
Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one  
and press [OK].  
chapter.  
If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and  
press [OK]. (47)  
Title  
Chapter  
Enter Name  
Start  
End  
Set up Protection  
Cancel Protection  
Refer to “Title  
operations”  
(47).  
[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each  
section between the division points becomes a chapter.  
(38, 47, Create Chapter)  
Partial Delete  
Change Thumbnail  
Divide Title  
Delete  
Properties  
Edit  
Title  
Chapter View  
Table Display  
Switching the Direct Navigator  
appearance 36  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a  
playlist (48).  
If you select “Chapter View”  
The maximum number of items on a disc:  
[HDD]  
5
Press [  
3
,
4
,
2
,
1
] to select the chapter.  
To start play Press [OK].  
–Titles:  
–Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title  
(Depends on the state of recording.)  
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
500  
To edit Step 6.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View  
HDD  
Chapter View screen  
008 ARD 11.10. SAT  
–Titles:  
–Chapters:  
99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)  
Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)  
(Depends on the state of recording.)  
001  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
0:31.24  
---  
[Note]  
To show other pages/Multiple editing (above)  
Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot  
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.  
You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.  
Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.  
dividing a title etc).  
6
Press [OPTION], then [  
3,  
4] to select  
the operation and press [OK].  
Delete Chapter  
[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the  
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount  
of free space decreases.  
Create Chapter  
Refer to “Chapter  
operations” (47).  
Combine Chapters  
Title View  
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.  
Editing titles/chapters and playing  
chapters  
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded  
programmes.  
You can go back to Title View.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Preparation  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit  
the connection to this unit.  
Turn the unit on.  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded  
title to be edited.  
[RAM] Release protection (58).  
RQT8881  
46  
Title operations  
After performing steps 1–4 (46)  
Delete§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.  
Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded  
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.  
Press [OK] to exit the screen.  
Properties  
Properties  
Dinosaur  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
No.  
026  
Time  
12:19  
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)  
Name ARD  
You can give names to recorded titles.  
57, Entering text  
Enter Name  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Set up Protection§  
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title V  
HDD  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.  
Cancel Protection§  
007  
008  
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
ARD 11.10.  
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete  
HDD  
Partial Delete  
1Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the  
section you want to delete.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
008  
PLAY  
Start  
End  
(below, For your reference)  
Next  
Finish  
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.  
3Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
0:43.21  
Start  
End  
- -:- -.- -  
- -:- -.- -  
OK  
RETURN  
You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title  
View.  
1Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.  
2Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a  
Change Thumbnail  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail  
HDD  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
008  
Change  
(below, For your reference)  
Finish  
0:00.00  
thumbnail is shown.  
To change the thumbnail  
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at  
the point you want to change.  
Start play and select the image  
Change  
of a thumbnail.  
- -:- -.- -  
ENTER  
3Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
You can divide a title into two.  
Divide Title  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
HDD  
Divide Title  
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.  
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
3Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].  
[HDD] [RAM]  
008  
PLAY  
Preview  
Divide  
(below, For your reference)  
Finish  
0:43.21  
To confirm the division point  
Divide  
- -:- -.- -  
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10  
seconds before and after the division point.)  
To change the division point  
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the  
title.  
[Note]  
The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (80) of the original title.  
Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.  
§ Multiple editing is possible.  
Chapter operations  
After performing steps 1–6 (46)  
Delete Chapter§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
Select “Combine Chapters” (below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.  
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the  
title.  
Create Chapter  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter  
HDD  
[HDD] [RAM]  
008  
PLAY  
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.  
Repeat this step to divide at other points.  
Create  
Finish  
(below, For your reference)  
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
0:43.21  
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].  
The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.  
Combine Chapters  
[HDD] [RAM]  
§ Multiple editing is possible.  
For your reference  
Use search (37), Time Slip (38) to find the desired point.  
To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (38) and Frame-by-frame (38).  
To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).  
RQT8881  
47  
Creating, editing and playing playlists  
Í
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and  
SELECT  
AV  
DRIVE SELECT  
PAGE  
CH  
press [OK].  
2 3  
1
4 5 6  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”  
ShowView  
8 9  
7
PROG/CHECK  
and press [OK].  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
Playlists  
HDD  
- -  
Playlist View  
- -  
- -  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
Create  
- -  
- -  
- -  
EXIT  
I
5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
and press [4].  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to  
step 7.  
RETURN  
OPTION  
CREATE  
Create  
Playlists  
HDD  
001 ARD 11.10. SAT  
You can arrange the chapters (46) to create a playlist.  
Source Title  
001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
002  
002  
---  
---  
Title  
Title  
Source Chapter  
001  
003  
---  
---  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapters in Playlist  
---  
---  
---  
OK  
OPTION  
Press RETURN to finish.  
RETURN  
6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you  
Playlist  
Chapter  
Chapter  
want to add to a playlist and press  
[OK].  
Press [3] to cancel.  
Copying (51) a playlist will create a title.  
Create  
Playlists  
HDD  
Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much  
capacity.  
Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles  
and source chapters.  
001 ARD 11.10. SAT  
Source Title  
001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
002  
002  
---  
---  
Source Chapter  
001  
003  
---  
---  
You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.  
Chapters in Playlist  
---  
---  
---  
[HDD] [RAM]  
The maximum number of items on a disc:  
OK  
OPTION  
Press RETURN to finish.  
RETURN  
–Playlists:  
–Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000  
(Depends on the state of recording.)  
99  
You can also create a new chapter from the source title.  
Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK]  
(47, Create Chapter).  
If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the  
items entered will not be recorded.  
7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to  
insert the chapter and press [OK].  
Creating playlists  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Playlists  
HDD  
Create  
001 ARD 11.10. SAT  
Source Title  
001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
002  
002  
---  
---  
Preparation  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate Video input to suit  
the connection to this unit.  
Turn the unit on.  
Source Chapter  
001  
003  
---  
---  
---  
Chapters in Playlist  
---  
---  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded  
title to be edited.  
OK  
Press RETURN to finish.  
RETURN  
[RAM] Release disc or cartridge protection (58).  
You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while  
copying.  
Press [3] to select other source titles.  
Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.  
Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system  
currently selected in “TV System” (68).  
8 Press [RETURN].  
All the selected scenes become the playlist.  
1
While stopped  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
and press [OK].  
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
ShowView Record  
Playback  
Recording  
Advanced Copy  
Playlists  
Delete  
Copy  
Flexible Rec  
DV Auto Rec  
To Others  
OK  
Setup  
HDD Management  
RETURN  
RQT8881  
48  
Editing and playing playlists/chapters  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Playlist operations  
After performing steps 1–5 (left)  
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)  
Delete§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press  
[OK].  
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and  
cannot be restored.  
Make certain before proceeding.  
1
While stopped  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
Playlist information (e.g., total time and date)  
is shown.  
Press [OK] to exit the screen.  
and press [OK].  
Properties  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-RW‹VR›]  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and  
Properties  
press [OK].  
Dinosaur  
No.  
10  
Date 12.10.2006 TUE  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
Chapters 002 Total 0:30.53  
playlist.  
RETURN  
OK  
To start play Press [OK].  
To edit Step 5.  
48, Creating playlists, Step 5–8  
Create  
Playlists  
HDD  
01  
Playlist View  
- -  
Playlist View screen  
[HDD] [RAM]  
- -  
Copy§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press  
[OK].  
The copied playlist becomes the newest  
one in the playlist view screen.  
12.10. SUN 0:30  
- -  
Create  
- -  
- -  
[HDD] [RAM]  
To show other pages/Multiple editing (46)  
5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select  
the operation and press [OK].  
You can give names to playlists.  
57, Entering text  
Enter  
Name  
[HDD] [RAM]  
If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and  
press [OK].  
47, Change Thumbnail  
Change  
Create  
Thumbnail  
Copy  
Refer to “Playlist  
operations”.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Enter Name  
Delete  
Change Thumbnail  
Properties  
§ Multiple editing is possible.  
Edit  
Chapter View  
Chapter operations  
[HDD] [RAM]  
After performing steps 1–7 (left)  
Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and  
source chapters.  
If you select “Chapter View”  
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
48, Creating playlists, Step 5–7  
Add  
chapter.  
Chapter  
To start play Press [OK].  
To edit Step 7.  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position  
to insert the chapter and press [OK].  
Move  
Chapter  
Playlists  
HDD  
Chapter View  
Chapter View screen  
01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30  
Playlists  
HDD  
Move Chapter  
001  
002  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
0:10.24  
0:19.36  
01 12.10. SUN 0:11  
002  
---  
---  
001  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
0:10.24  
0:19.36  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
To show other pages/Multiple editing (46)  
7 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select  
the operation and press [OK].  
Add Chapter  
Previous  
Page 01/01  
Next  
OK  
RETURN  
47, Create Chapter  
Create  
Chapter  
Move Chapter  
Refer to “Chapter  
operations”.  
Create Chapter  
Combine Chapters  
Delete Chapter  
47, Combine Chapters  
Combine  
Chapters  
Playlist View  
47, Delete Chapter  
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all  
the chapters in it.  
You can go back to Playlist View.  
Delete  
Chapter§  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
§ Multiple editing is possible.  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT8881  
49  
Delete Navigator  
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete  
DVD  
TV  
Í
1
While stopped  
Í
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
PAGE  
CH  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and  
2 3  
1
press [OK].  
4 5 6  
ShowView  
DELETE Navigator  
HDD  
Title View  
8 9  
0
7
- - -  
- - -  
007  
008  
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
DELETE,  
¢
ARD 10.10. FRI  
- - -  
ARD 11.10. SAT  
- - -  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
:, 9  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
Previous  
Page 02/02  
Next  
;
OK  
Select  
OPTION  
Previous  
Next  
RETURN  
EXIT  
I
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
and press [OK].  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
You can confirm the titles that you have selected using the  
option menu.  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Title View” (46,  
step 4).  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
To show other pages  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)  
Still pictures cannot be deleted.  
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Multiple editing  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain  
before proceeding.  
You cannot delete while recording or copying.  
4 Press [2] to select “Delete” and press  
Preparation  
[OK].  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
[RAM] Release protection (58, Setting the protection).  
The title is deleted.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Available disc space after deleting  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
[HDD] [RAM] If you delete a recorded title, the space deleted  
becomes available for recording.  
Deleting titles during play  
Available disc space increases after  
deleting any of these titles  
1
While playing  
Press [DELETE ¢].  
Available  
disc space  
......  
Last title  
recorded  
Title  
Title  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and  
press [OK].  
The title is deleted.  
[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the  
last recorded title is deleted.  
Available disc space does  
Available disc space  
not increase even after  
increases after deleting  
deleting  
Last title  
recorded  
Available  
disc space  
......  
Title  
Title  
[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even  
after the contents are deleted.  
RQT8881  
50  
Copying titles or playlists  
Copy  
Advanced Copy  
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult Make a copy list and then copy.  
Features  
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the  
settings.  
way you want.  
HDD DVD  
Copy direction  
DVD HDD  
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]  
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)  
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with  
finalised discs.  
High speed mode copy§1  
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from  
+RW to HDD.  
§2  
Changing recording mode  
Finalise§3  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Automatically finalised  
Can be selected  
High speed mode  
Normal speed mode  
High speed mode  
Normal speed mode  
Copying playlists§4  
§5  
§5  
Are chapters maintained?  
Are thumbnails maintained?  
Recording and Playing while Copying  
§6  
§7  
§6  
§8  
§1 To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD  
(The default setting is “On”. 63).  
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.  
When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with  
high-speed copy.  
Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.  
Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.).  
Titles that contain many deleted segments.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed  
)
§2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent  
against degradation of picture quality.)  
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.  
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (  
§4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.  
60).  
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.  
§5 [RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes [+R] about 8-minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.  
§6 Thumbnails return to the default position.  
§7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.  
§8 Possible only with titles on the HDD  
(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation.)  
You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.  
You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (8).  
–Still pictures cannot be played.  
Approximate copying times (Max. speed)  
(excludes time required to write data management information)  
5X Speed  
DVD-RAM  
12X Speed  
4X Speed  
4X Speed  
8X Speed  
+R§4  
4X Speed  
+R DL§2  
4X Speed  
+RW  
HDD  
DVD-R DL§2  
DVD-R§1  
DVD-RW§3  
Required  
Required  
time  
Required  
time  
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
3 min. 45 s. 16  
2 min. 30 s. 24  
1 min. 53 s. 32  
Required  
time  
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
3 min. 45 s. 16  
2 min. 30 s. 24  
1 min. 57 s. 31  
Required  
time  
8 min. 20 s.  
3 min. 45 s. 16  
1 min. 53 s. 32  
Required  
time  
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
3 min. 45 s. 16  
Required  
time  
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
3 min. 45 s. 16x  
Recording  
Mode  
XP  
SP  
LP  
Recorded  
Speed  
Speed  
Speed  
Speed  
Speed  
Speed  
Speed  
time  
12 min.  
6 min.  
3 min.  
2 min.  
5
x
5 min. 46 s. 10  
2 min. 30 s. 24  
1 min. 21 s. 44  
58 sec. 62  
48 sec. 75  
x
x
x
x
x
4
8
x
x
4
8
x
x
7
x
4
8
x
x
4
8
x
x
1
10  
20  
30  
x
x
x
x
x
x
1 hour  
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
EP (6H)  
EP (8H)  
1 min. 30 s. 40  
The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed  
recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the times and speeds will vary.  
§1 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.  
§2 In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and  
+R DL.  
§3 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.  
§4 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.  
[Note]  
When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.  
Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.  
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer)  
and +R DL (single-sided, Double Layer)  
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily  
copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed  
to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to  
the HDD are then deleted.  
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.  
–When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When  
copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when  
copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP  
mode is needed on the HDD.)  
Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One time  
only recording”  
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (80) compatible DVD-  
RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.  
Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD.  
Titles will not be copied if they are protected (47).  
You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only recording”  
titles.  
Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be registered  
on the same copying list.  
–When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles  
to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 500 in total.  
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may  
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (5)  
RQT8881  
51  
Copying titles or playlists  
PAGE  
1
While stopped  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
CH  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
ShowView  
8 9  
7
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and  
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
press [OK].  
SKIP  
SLOW/SSEARCH  
:, 9  
COPY Navigator  
HDD  
;
1
Destination Capacity: 4310MB  
Total  
:
0
Size:  
0MB( 0%)  
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
001  
002  
003  
004  
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30  
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15  
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00  
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05  
Rec time  
0:52(SP)  
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10  
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25  
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30  
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00  
---  
I
Page 01/01  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
Select  
OPTION  
OK  
RETURN  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title you  
RETURN  
“Green”  
OPTION  
“Red”  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
want to copy and press [OK].  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
To show other pages  
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
STATUS  
Multiple editing  
Select with [3, 4] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
Press [OK] to register.  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
Before copying  
When copying a title with main and secondary audio  
Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from  
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (64) when:  
4
After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-  
–Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),  
+R, +R DL and +RW.  
–When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (64)  
and you are copying in XP mode.  
Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play-  
only and you can no longer record or edit.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
press [OK].  
Copy starts.  
Speed and recording mode when copying  
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed  
[HDD]  
>
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following table.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Rec for High Speed Copy (63)  
Copy speed  
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High  
Speed Copy” set to “On”. §  
High speed  
To stop copying 54  
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and  
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High  
Speed Copy” set to “Off”.  
functions 54  
Normal speed  
When making a copy of multiple titles that  
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed  
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.  
§ In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to  
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”  
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.  
When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for  
Recording” do not match.  
When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
To check the properties of a title and sort COPY  
Navigator  
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press  
[OPTION].  
COPY Navigator  
HDD  
Destination Capacity: 4310MB  
Size: 0MB( 0%)  
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title  
Total  
:
0
001  
002  
003  
004  
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30  
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15  
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00  
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05  
Rec time  
0:52(SP)  
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10  
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25  
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30  
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00  
---  
Page 01/01  
Properties  
Sort  
OK  
RETURN  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR  
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”  
and press [OK].  
Properties:  
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are  
shown.  
[Note]  
Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system (PAL  
or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot  
be copied.  
Preparation  
Insert a disc that you can use for copying (4, 5).  
Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.  
Sort:  
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to  
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start  
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)  
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is  
cancelled.  
Copy  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL  
are automatically finalised (80). After finalising, the discs  
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD  
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.  
[Note]  
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)  
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording  
compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the  
sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.  
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in  
“DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (63).  
If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title  
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.  
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and  
then copy the contents of the list (53).  
When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR.  
(However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode,  
copy will not be performed.)  
RQT8881  
52  
6 Register titles and playlists for copy.  
Copying using the copying list–  
Advanced Copy  
If you are going to copy a registered list without making any  
changes to it (step 7).  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]  
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]  
Copy  
[HDD]  
>
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Cancel All  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
( 0%)  
0MB  
Size:  
Name of item  
New item (Total=0)  
Copy Direction  
HDD ꢀꢁDVD  
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.  
1
2
3
No. Size  
Copy Mode  
VIDEO High Speed  
See also “Before copying” (52).  
Create List  
Page 01/01  
Create copy list.  
1
While stopped  
Start Copying  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the  
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
and press [OK].  
Create List  
HDD  
VIDEO Playlists  
- - -  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced  
007  
008  
0:30(XP)  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
- - -  
ARD 11.10. SAT  
- - -  
Copy” and press [OK].  
- - -  
Copy  
Cancel All  
Source  
HDD  
DVD  
Previous  
Page 02/02  
Next  
Previous  
1 Copy Direction  
HDD ꢀꢁDVD  
OK  
Select  
OPTION  
Next  
Destination  
RETURN  
Copy Mode  
2
VIDEO High Speed  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the titles or playlists and  
press [OK].  
0
Create List  
3
When copying to a disc using high speed mode,  
Select the copy direction.  
Start Copying  
OK  
RETURN  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “  
” can be registered.  
” or  
If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]  
several times (step 7).  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “  
” can  
4 Set the copy direction.  
be registered.  
To select a multiple number of items together, press  
[;] to add the check mark and press [OK]  
(below, Multiple editing).  
To show other pages (below)  
To edit the copying list (54)  
If you are not going to change the copying direction, press  
[4] (step 5).  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].  
If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to  
“DVD”, or vice versa.  
You can register a multiple number of titles and  
playlists on the copying list by repeating  
steps 24.  
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”  
(54) exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not  
sufficient).  
4 Press [2] to confirm.  
5 Set the recording mode.  
If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]  
(step 6).  
5 Press [2] to confirm.  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].  
“Format” is automatically set to “VIDEO”.  
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start  
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press  
[OK]  
Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK]  
Copying” and press [OK].  
.
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed  
recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or  
+RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than  
normal.  
3
.
4 Press [2] to confirm.  
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal  
(Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup  
menu (63).  
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
press [OK] to start copying.  
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or  
“Copy Only” and press [OK].  
If “Copy & Finalise” is selected  
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also  
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no  
longer record or edit.  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Multiple editing  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
Press [OK] to register to the list.  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab, the  
check mark is cancelled.  
RQT8881  
(Continued on the next page)  
53  
Copying titles or playlists  
(Continued)  
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and  
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after  
copy.  
Refer to the control reference on page 52.  
To stop copying  
To edit the copying list  
Delete All  
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.  
(You cannot stop while finalising)  
Select the item in step 6–4 (53, right column)  
Add  
1
2
Press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press  
When High-speed copying  
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are  
copied.  
Delete  
Move  
[OK].  
When Normal Speed copying  
Delete All:  
Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time  
only recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied  
at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are  
cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain  
on the HDD.  
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while  
temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied.  
However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to  
disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the  
point canceled are copied.  
Delete all items registered on the copying list.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
Add:  
Add new items to the copying list.  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the playlists and titles to be added and  
press [OK].  
Delete:  
Delete the selected items.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
You can also delete multiple items (53, Multiple editing).  
Move:  
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.  
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].  
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-  
RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of  
remaining writable disc space becomes less.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists  
After performing steps 1–3 (53, left column)  
Recording and playing while copying  
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed  
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)  
Still pictures cannot be played.  
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.  
To confirm the current progress  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.  
–When a title has been recorded or deleted at the copy source  
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,  
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.  
Press [STATUS].  
[Note]  
Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the  
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.  
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)  
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions  
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators  
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high  
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW  
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high  
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)  
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in  
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)  
[+R]DL]  
is displayed, but copy cannot be  
performed.  
Title with “One time only recording” restriction  
(8, When recording the “One time only  
recording” broadcasts)  
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only  
recording” restriction after copying.  
(8, When recording the “One time only  
recording” broadcasts)  
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)  
Still picture(s) cannot be copied.  
Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding  
system from that of the TV system currently  
selected on the unit.  
(NTSC)  
(PAL)  
Titles and playlists displaying these marks  
cannot be selected.  
Data size of each registered item  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Size:  
Size:  
0MB (0%)  
No. Size  
Name of item  
Data size recorded to the copy  
destination  
New item (Total=0)  
When copying at normal speed, the  
total data size will change according to  
the recording mode.  
Page 01/01  
Create copy list.  
The total data size shown may be  
larger than the sum of the data sizes  
for each registered item, because of  
data management information being  
written to the copy destination, etc.  
RQT8881  
54  
8
When the top menu is displayed  
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and  
+R DL  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title  
you want to start copying, and press  
[OK].  
[DVD-V]  
>
[HDD]  
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW  
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.  
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD  
according to the set time.  
My favorite  
01/02  
01  
Chapter  
02  
Chapter  
1
2
03  
Chapter  
04  
Chapter  
3
4
05  
06  
If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that  
portion of title is not recorded.  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (63) is set to “On” and you  
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected  
in “Aspect for Recording” (63) of the Setup menu.  
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are  
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has  
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is  
reached.)  
To return to the previous screen  
Operations and on screen displays during copy are also  
recorded.  
Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent  
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.  
Press [RETURN].  
To stop copying  
Press [].  
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop  
copying.  
If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.  
The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.  
Preparation  
Insert the finalised disc (36).  
[Note]  
The screen saver on the right is recorded at the  
beginning.  
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-  
Video”) (53, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)  
The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of  
copy to the end.  
If play does not begin automatically or if the top  
menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.  
Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original  
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.  
If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video  
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (53, Copying  
using the copying list–Advanced Copy).  
6 Set “Copy Time”.  
If you are not going to change the setting (step 7).  
Setting the unit to copy according to the set  
time  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].  
Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].  
4 Press [2] to confirm.  
Copy will continue until there is not enough available  
recording space on the HDD.  
Setting the copying time  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].  
Copy  
Cancel All  
1 Copy Direction  
DVD ꢀꢁHDD  
2
Hour  
00 Min.  
Copy Mode  
2
3
DVD-Video XP  
Set the time a few minutes  
longer.  
Copy Time  
Press OK to change the setting.  
Start Copying  
OK  
RETURN  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4]  
to set the recording time.  
6 Press [OK].  
7 Press [2] to confirm.  
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after  
the content being played finishes.  
Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to  
include the operation time before play begins.  
You can also set the recording time with the numbered  
buttons.  
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start  
Copying” and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK] to start copying.  
The disc top menu is displayed.  
Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is  
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising  
the disc (60).  
RQT8881  
55  
Copying from a video cassette recorder  
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
2 Start play on the other equipment.  
DRIVE SELECT  
PAGE  
CH  
2 3  
4 5 6  
3
When you want to start recording  
1
Press [¥ REC].  
ShowView  
Recording starts.  
8 9  
7
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
INPUT SELECT  
To skip unwanted parts  
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
;
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated  
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so  
treated cannot be recorded using this unit.  
I
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
3,4,2,1  
Using Flexible Recording (29), you can record the content of a  
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best  
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.  
OK  
OPTION  
REC  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
REC MODE  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)  
¥ REC  
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.  
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes  
are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at  
each break in the images and the playlist is created automatically.  
REC  
OPEN/CLOSE  
Preparation  
This unit  
1
Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the  
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (left column).  
Turn on the main unit and DV equipment.  
Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.  
Pause play of the DV equipment at the point you want recording  
to start.  
DV IN  
2
3
4
VIDEO  
L/MONO - AUDIO- R  
S VIDEO  
AV3 IN  
Yellow White Red  
When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,  
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (68).  
DV cable  
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)  
S Video  
cable§  
Audio/Video  
cable  
After preparation is completed, the following screen appears.  
DV Auto Rec  
Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to  
HDD” or “Rec to DVD” and press  
[OK].  
DV unit is connected.  
Record from the DV unit?  
Other video equipment  
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.  
Rec to HDD  
Rec to DVD  
Cancel  
You can proceed to step 4.  
SELECT  
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural  
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.  
§ The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the  
VIDEO terminal.  
RETURN  
OK  
When the screen is not displayed, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select  
HDD or DVD and then continue from step 1.  
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal  
Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”  
in the Setup menu (64).  
When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),  
you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (63) is set to “On” and you  
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected  
in “Aspect for Recording” (63) of the Setup menu.  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
and press [OK].  
About the aspect when recording a programme (8)  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec”  
[Note]  
and press [OK].  
If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the  
recording will start and the copying will stop.  
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec” and  
press [OK].  
Manual recording  
Recording starts.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
Preparation  
When recording finishes  
The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK] to finish DV automatic  
recording.  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.  
When recording bilingual programmes (8, Important notes for  
recording)  
When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,  
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (68).  
This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC  
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded  
onto the HDD.)  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
[Note]  
Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can  
be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.  
It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.  
The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It  
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)  
To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “AV-in  
NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (45).  
Check the time on the unit is correct.  
The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.  
Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be  
input properly.  
The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will  
not be recorded.  
You cannot record and play simultaneously.  
1
While stopped  
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the  
input channel for the equipment you  
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,  
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the  
unit off and back on.  
have connected.  
RQT8881  
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select “A3”.  
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual  
recording (left column).  
56  
Entering text  
SELECT  
AV  
PAGE  
CH  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
character and press [OK].  
Repeat this step to enter other characters.  
ShowView  
8 9  
7
To delete a character  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field  
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)  
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
DELETE,  
¢
SKIP  
SLOW/SSEARCH  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
Using the numbered buttons to enter characters  
STOP  
;
e.g., entering the letter “R”  
1
Press [7] to move to the 7th row.  
I
5
J
K
N
Q
U
L
O
R
V
2 Press [7] twice to highlight  
7
7
“R”.  
6 M  
OK  
3 Press [OK].  
3,4,2,1  
7
P
T
7
OK  
To enter a space  
Press [DELETE ¢] and press  
[OK].  
OPTION  
REC  
RETURN  
RETURN  
“Green”  
CREATE  
8
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
“Red”  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
3 Press [] (Set).  
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.  
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view  
screen and so on.  
The maximum number of characters:  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Characters  
64 (44§)  
64  
To end partway  
Title  
Press [RETURN].  
Text is not added.  
Playlist  
Disc ([RAM])  
64  
§ Title name for timer recording  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Characters  
For your reference  
Title  
Disc  
44  
40  
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu  
after finalisation (60). When entering a title name, the name that  
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”  
window.  
[Note]  
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.  
Standard Characters  
Other Characters  
Enter Name  
Chapter 1_  
_
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
/
9
$
0
Top Menu Preview  
Chapter 1  
1 Show Enter Name screen.  
*
%
Title (timer recording)  
i
7
&
Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 32, right  
column.  
Title  
Select “Enter Name” in step 4 on page 46.  
Playlist  
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 49.  
Disc  
Select “Disc Name” in step 4 of “Providing a name for a  
disc” on page 58.  
Name field: shows the text you have entered  
Press the “Red” button or  
Standard Characters  
Other Characters  
Enter Name  
_
“Green” button to select  
character type and press  
[OK].  
“Standard Characters”:  
(left, Alphabet characters,  
etc.)  
“Other Characters”:  
(below, Umlaut characters,  
accented characters, etc.)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
/
9
$
0
Top Menu Preview  
*
d
g
j
%
h
k
i
7
[
&
@
_
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
]
Delete  
m
n
o
M
P
T
Set  
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
(
)
-
v
}
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
\
ꢁꢁ  
0
9
^
`
SELECT  
Space  
RETURN  
OK  
¡
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
¢
¬
£
-
¤
®
¸
¥
¦
§
¨
©
³
ª
´
«
µ
¿
É
Ó
Ý
ç
¯
¹
°
º
²
·
»
¼
Æ
Ð
½
Ç
Ñ
Û
å
¾
È
Á
Ë
Õ
ß
é
ó
ý
Â
Ì
Ã
Í
Ä
Î
À
Ê
Ô
Þ
è
Å
Ï
Ò
Ü
æ
ð
×
Ø
Ù
Ú
Ö
à
ê
ô
þ
á
ë
õ
ÿ
â
ì
ã
í
ä
î
ï
ñ
û
ò
ö
÷
ø
ú
ù
ü
Space  
RQT8881  
57  
HDD and disc management  
Setting the protection  
[RAM]  
DVD  
TV  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
Preparation  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
DRIVE SELECT  
PAGE  
CH  
2 3  
1
After performing steps 1–3 (left)  
4 5 6  
ShowView  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc  
8 9  
7
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
Protection” and press [OK].  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
press [OK].  
DVD  
EXIT  
I
Titles  
Used  
11  
0 : 22  
Remain 5:38 (EP)  
Management  
DVD-RAM  
Disc Name  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
Disc Protection  
Delete all titles  
On  
3,4,2,1  
OPTION  
RETURN  
SELECT  
OK  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
OK  
Format Disc  
RETURN  
MANUAL SKIP  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-  
protected.  
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
Cartridge-protection  
Common procedures  
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge  
With the write-protect tab in the protect position,  
1
While stopped  
play automatically starts when inserted in the  
unit.  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
PROTECT  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
and press [OK].  
FUNCTION MENU  
Providing a name for a disc  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
ShowView Record  
Playback  
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Recording  
Advanced Copy  
Playlists  
Delete  
Copy  
You can provide a name for each disc.  
Flexible Rec  
DV Auto Rec  
To Others  
OK  
Setup  
Preparation  
HDD Management  
RETURN  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
[RAM] Release protection (above).  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD  
After performing steps 1–3 (left)  
Management” or “DVD Management”  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”  
and press [OK].  
and press [OK].  
e.g., [RAM]  
DVD  
57, Entering text  
Titles  
Used  
11  
0 : 22  
Remain 5:38 (EP)  
Management  
DVD-RAM  
The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is  
displayed on the Top Menu.  
[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other  
equipment.  
Disc Name  
Disc Protection  
Delete all titles  
Off  
SELECT  
OK  
Format Disc  
RETURN  
Documentary  
My favorite  
01/02  
DVD  
Management  
DVD-RAM  
Titles  
Used  
11  
0 : 22  
Remain 5:38 (  
01  
Chapter  
02  
Chapter  
1
2
When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and  
“Format HDD” are displayed.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT8881  
58  
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete  
all titles  
Deleting all the contents of a disc—  
Format  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)  
Preparation  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
Release protection (58).  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
Release protection (58).  
After performing steps 1–3 (58)  
[Note]  
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),  
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before  
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc  
even if you have set protection.  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all  
titles” and press [OK].  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
press [OK].  
After performing steps 1–3 (58)  
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”  
press [OK].  
A message appears when finished.  
or “Format Disc” and press [OK].  
7 Press [OK].  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
press [OK].  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
press [OK].  
A message appears when formatting is finished.  
[Note]  
Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may  
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).  
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.  
This can render the disc unusable.  
[Note]  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be  
restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.  
Still picture data (JPEG) or computer data cannot be deleted.  
Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.  
7 Press [OK].  
[Note]  
When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may not be  
possible to use it on any other equipment.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed on the disc.  
You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.  
To stop formatting [RAM]  
Press [RETURN].  
You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc  
must be reformatted if you do this.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT8881  
59  
HDD and disc management  
Refer to the control reference on page 58.  
[Note]  
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take  
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four  
times).  
Selecting the background style–Top Menu  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
After finalising  
[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you  
can no longer record or edit.  
[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting  
(59) although it becomes play-only after finalising.  
When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] Titles are divided into about 5-minute ([+R] 8-  
minute)§ chapters, if  
–the titles were directly recorded to the disc.  
–the titles were copied using any mode other than the high  
speed mode (excluding [-R]DL] [+R]DL]).  
§ This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode  
of recording.  
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-  
Video top menu after finalising.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
After performing steps 1–3 (58)  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”  
and press [OK].  
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
background and press [OK].  
Top Menu List  
There is a pause of several seconds between titles and  
chapters during play.  
1
2
3
Display after finalising  
01  
Thumbnail  
Before  
After  
finalising  
(Still picture)  
finalising  
Title Name  
Recording/Editing/Entering name  
Play on other players  
You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (47,  
Change Thumbnail)  
Selecting whether to show the Top  
Menu first–Auto-Play Select  
You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s  
equipment.  
If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than  
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be  
displayed.  
Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players  
due to the condition of the recording.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.  
After performing steps 1–3 (58)  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play  
Select” and press [OK].  
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu  
[+RW]  
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient  
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW  
disc on other equipment.  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or  
“Title 1” and press [OK].  
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.  
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.  
Title 1:  
The disc content is played without displaying the  
top menu.  
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (left  
column) before creating top menu.  
Enabling discs to be played on other  
equipment–Finalise  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (above)  
before finalising the disc.  
After performing steps 1–3 (58)  
Preparation  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
Menu” and press [OK].  
After performing steps 1–3 (58)  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and  
press [OK].  
press [OK].  
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
press [OK].  
press [OK].  
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.  
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.  
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
press [OK].  
7 Press [OK].  
A message appears when finalising is finished.  
[Note]  
[Note]  
You cannot cancel finalising.  
You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the  
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such  
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.  
Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.  
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)  
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.  
This will render the disc unusable.  
7 Press [OK].  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT8881  
60  
FUNCTION MENU window  
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main  
functions quickly and easily.  
DVD  
TV  
Í
Í
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of  
disc.  
PAGE  
CH  
2 3  
1
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
4 5 6  
Playback  
ShowView  
Recording  
8 9  
0
7
PROG/CHECK  
Delete  
Copy  
DELETE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
To Others  
OK  
RETURN  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
I
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and  
press [OK].  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
If you select “To Others” and press [OK], the following screen  
appears. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [OK].  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
FUNCTION MENU  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
Timer Recording  
ShowView Record  
MANUAL SKIP  
“Timer Recording”  
Playback  
appears in countries  
where the GUIDE Plus+  
system is available.  
Recording  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
Advanced Copy  
Playlists  
Delete  
Copy  
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
Flexible Rec  
DV Auto Rec  
To Others  
OK  
Setup  
RETURN  
HDD Management  
If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous  
screen.  
To exit the FUNCTION MENU window  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Child Lock  
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote  
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.  
ShowView  
8 9  
7
PROG/CHECK  
INPUT  
DELETE  
0
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
Press and hold [OK] and  
[RETURN]  
simultaneously until “X  
HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
I
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears  
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.  
OK  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
To cancel the Child Lock  
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD”  
disappears.  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
RQT8881  
61  
Changing the unit’s settings  
Common procedures  
W
X
CH  
1
While stopped  
REC  
OPEN/CLOSE  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
< OPEN/CLOSE  
and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and  
press [OK].  
DVD  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and  
TV  
Í
Í
VOL  
CH  
press [1].  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
Menus  
Options  
Tabs  
PAGE  
CH  
2 3  
1
Setup  
Remote Control  
Clock  
DVD 1  
Numbered  
buttons  
4 5 6  
Power Save  
Quick Start  
DivX Registration  
Initialize  
Off  
On  
ShowView  
Tuning  
8 9  
0
7
Disc  
Picture  
Sound  
PROG/CHECK  
DELETE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
Display  
Connection  
Others  
TAB  
SELECT  
OK  
RETURN  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and  
EXIT  
I
press [OK].  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
OK  
6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and  
3,4,2,1  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
press [OK].  
RETURN  
“Yellow”  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
“Red”  
To return to the previous screen  
REC  
REC MODE  
EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC  
“Green”  
Press [RETURN].  
AUDIO  
STATUS DISPLAY TIME SLIP  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
[Note]  
There may be differences in operation methods. If this happens,  
follow the on-screen instructions for the operation.  
RQT8881  
62  
Summary of settings  
The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.  
Tabs  
Menus  
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)  
Manual Tuning (67)  
Tuning  
Auto-Setup Restart (68)  
Download from TV (68)  
Settings for Playback  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
Disc  
Ratings  
8 No Limit: All DVD-Video can be played.  
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.  
1 to 7:  
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding  
ratings recorded on them.  
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password  
with the numbered buttons when the password screen is  
shown.  
0 Lock All: Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.  
Unlock Recorder  
Change Password  
Temporary Unlock  
Change Level  
Do not forget your password.  
Soundtrack Choose the language for audio, subtitle and  
disc menus. [DVD-V]  
English  
Spanish  
German  
Dutch  
French  
Swedish  
Italian  
Some discs start in a certain language despite  
any changes you make here.  
Original: The original language of each disc will be selected.  
Other ¢¢¢¢  
In case of English/French/German/Italian/  
Subtitle  
Menus  
Automatic: If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not  
available, subtitles of that language will automatically  
appear if available on that disc.  
English  
Spanish  
Spanish/Dutch/Swedish languages, when you  
make download from TV, and Country setting  
of Auto-Setup in plug-in, the language  
(“Soundtrack”/“Menus”) will be same and  
“Subtitle” will set to “Automatic”.  
Enter a code (69) with the numbered  
buttons when you select “Other ¢¢¢¢”.  
When the selected language is not available  
on the disc, the default language is played.  
German  
Dutch  
French  
Swedish  
Italian  
Other ¢¢¢¢  
English  
Spanish  
German  
Dutch  
French  
Swedish  
Italian  
There are discs where you can only switch the Other ¢¢¢¢  
language from the menu screen (37).  
Settings for Recording  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
Recording time in EP mode  
EP (6 Hours):You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB  
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP  
mode (27, Recording modes and approximate recording  
times).  
disc.  
EP (8 Hours):You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB  
disc.  
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when  
using “EP (8 Hours)”.  
Aspect for Recording  
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying.  
Automatic: The programme will be recorded in the original  
aspect used when recording started (including when  
When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with  
“Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be  
recorded in the original aspect ratio.  
recording started at a commercial, etc.).  
16:9  
4:3  
In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,  
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or  
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
–When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.  
Rec for High Speed Copy  
On: You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press [2, 1] to  
select “Yes” and press [OK].  
You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R,  
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and  
+RW using high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is  
restricted (right).  
The following restrictions are applied to recorded titles.  
–Recordings are made using the aspect ratio set in  
“Aspect for Recording” (above).  
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to  
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.  
This setting is effective when recording from a television  
programme or external equipment (including DV equipment),  
or when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.  
–Select the type of audio in advance from “Bilingual  
Audio Selection” (64).  
You are no longer able to switch the audio when  
watching a programme on an input channel on the TV  
connected to this unit (e.g., AV1, etc).  
Off  
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy  
Maximum  
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-  
speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW  
4X discs).  
Normal (Silent):  
Selecting “Normal (Silent)” means the noise generated by this  
unit is less than “Maximum”, however the time required for  
copying will double (approximately).  
(continued on the next page)  
RQT8881  
63  
Changing the unit’s settings  
(continued)  
Refer to the control reference on page 62.  
Tabs  
Menus  
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)  
Comb Filter  
On: Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting.  
Off: Select it when recording noisy pictures.  
Picture  
Select the picture sharpness when recording.  
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”  
(68).  
Still Mode  
Automatic  
Field: Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.  
(The picture is coarser.)  
Frame: Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen  
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture is  
clearer and finer.)  
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play  
(80, Frames and fields).  
Seamless Play  
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and  
partially deleted titles.  
On: The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does  
not work when there are several audio types included on  
the playlist and when using Quick View. Additionally, the  
positioning of chapter segments may change slightly.  
Off: The points where chapters in playlists change are played  
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.  
Dynamic Range Compression [DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)  
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.  
On  
Off  
Sound  
Bilingual Audio Selection  
M 1  
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type  
when:  
M 2  
You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an  
–Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD- external source, such as when copying from a video cassette  
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.  
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.  
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV  
input terminal). Select on the other equipment.  
–Recording or copying sound in LPCM (below, “Audio Mode When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of  
for XP Recording”).  
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (below).  
Digital Audio Output  
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (16).  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
PCM Down Conversion  
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96  
kHz or 88.2 kHz.  
Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the  
settings across if the signals have a sampling frequency  
of over 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy  
protection.  
On: Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose  
when the connected equipment cannot process signals  
with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)  
Off: Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose when  
the connected equipment can process signals with a  
sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)  
Dolby Digital  
Select how to output the signal.  
Select “Bitstream” if the connected  
equipment decodes the signal.  
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the  
signal and outputs it as 2 channels.  
Bitstream:When connecting to equipment displaying the Dolby  
Digital logo.  
PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the Dolby  
Digital logo.  
DTS  
Bitstream: When connecting to equipment displaying the DTS  
logo.  
[Note]  
PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the DTS  
Not making the proper settings may  
result in noise or some trouble for  
digital recording.  
logo.  
MPEG  
Bitstream: When connected to equipment with a built-in  
MPEG decoder.  
PCM: When connected to equipment without a built-in MPEG  
decoder.  
Audio Mode for XP Recording  
Dolby Digital (80)  
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP  
mode.  
LPCM (81)  
–The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than  
that of normal XP mode recordings.  
–The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you  
selected LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.  
–When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of  
audio in advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (above).  
Audio Mode for DV Input  
Stereo 1: Records audio (L1, R1).  
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s Stereo 2: Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)  
DV input terminal (56).  
subsequent to original recording.  
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.  
Mix:  
When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in  
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (above).  
RQT8881  
64  
Tabs  
Menus  
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)  
Language  
English  
Español  
Deutsch  
Nederlands  
Français  
Italiano  
Display  
Choose the language for these menus and on-screen messages.  
On-Screen Messages  
Automatic  
Choose whether to show status messages automatically.  
Off  
Grey Background  
On  
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey  
background when tuner reception is weak.  
Off  
FL Display  
Bright  
Dim  
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.  
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”  
(66) to “On”.  
Automatic: The display turns dark during play and disappears  
when the unit is turned off. It reappears momentarily  
if a button is pressed. While using this mode, the  
standby power consumption can be reduced.  
TV Aspect (20)  
Set to match the type of 16:9  
Connection  
television connected.  
Pan & Scan  
Letterbox  
Progressive (24)  
On  
Off  
This setting is fixed with “Off” if you set  
“AV1 Output” to “RGB 1 (without  
component)” or “RGB 2 (without  
component)”.  
TV System (68)  
PAL  
NTSC  
HDMI Settings  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
HDMI Video Format  
You can only select items compatible with the connected  
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be  
576i/480i  
576p/480p  
720p  
changed. However if you are concerned about output picture 1080i  
quality, it may be improved by changing the setting.  
Still pictures play at a resolution equivalent to 480p regardless  
of the settings.  
1080p:  
When setting video output to “1080p”, we  
recommend using a Panasonic HDMI cable 5 meters  
or less in length to prevent video distortion.  
Automatic: Automatically selects the output resolution best  
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,  
720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).  
Aspect for 4:3 Video  
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set  
how to show images on the TV screen.  
4:3:  
Picture output expands left or right.  
16:9: Picture is output as original aspect with  
side panels.  
Digital Audio Output  
HDMI and Optical  
Optical Only: Select when this unit is connected to an amplifier  
with an optical digital audio cable and connected  
to a TV with an HDMI cable and you want to enjoy  
the highest quality of audio from discs (16).  
VIERA Link  
On  
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an Off: Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.  
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.  
AV1 Output  
Selects the output from the AV1 terminal.  
Select “RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without  
component)” for RGB output.  
Video (with component):  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite  
signal.  
S Video (with component):  
Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)”  
for component output (progressive output).  
Set according to the signal and terminal of the connected TV.  
When a decoder is connected, do not set to “RGB 1 (without  
component)”.  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video  
signal.  
RGB 1 (without component):  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.  
If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB  
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch  
to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.  
If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select  
“RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”. RGB 2 (without component):  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.  
If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit  
only when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.  
(continued on the next page)  
RQT8881  
65  
Changing the unit’s settings  
(continued)  
Refer to the control reference on page 62.  
Tabs  
Menus  
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)  
AV2 Settings (Set to match the connected equipment.)  
Connection  
(continued)  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
AV2 Input  
RGB/Video  
Video  
RGB  
S Video  
Set to “RGB/Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording  
RGB output from external equipment.  
AV2 Connection  
This setting is fixed with “Ext” if you set “TV System” to  
“NTSC” (68).  
Decoder:When a decoder is connected to descramble the  
scrambled signals (e.g., C+decoder).  
Ext:  
When the VCR or a digital/satellite receiver is  
connected.  
Ext Link  
Ext Link 1: When a digital/satellite receiver which transmits a  
special control signal recordings via the 21-pin Scart  
cable is connected.  
This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to  
“NTSC” (68).  
Start and stop timings of recording are controlled by  
the control signal.  
Ext Link 2: When external equipment with a timer function is  
connected.  
When it turns on, recording starts.  
When it turns off, recording stops.  
Remote Control (25)  
DVD 1  
DVD 2  
DVD 3  
Others  
Clock (69)  
Power Save  
On: Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned to  
Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.  
–“FL Display” is automatically set to “Automatic” (65).  
–The “Quick Start” function does not work. (It is automatically  
turned to “Off”.)  
standby (82).  
Off:  
(If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically  
–When the unit is off, Pay TV programmes cannot be watched turned to “Off”.)  
on the TV because the signal from the connected decoder is  
not looped through. To watch them, turn on the unit.  
Quick Start  
On  
Off:  
The Quick Start feature enables this unit to be ready to start  
recording as quick as approx. 1 second§ after turning it on. You  
can start recording soon after deciding you want to record  
something.  
Standby power consumption is less than when this is set  
to “On”.  
(If this is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to  
“Off”.)  
§Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM.  
Startup takes up to a minute when:  
You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-  
RAM.  
You want to make other operations.  
–The clock has not been set.  
DivX Registration  
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content (41).  
Initialize  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
Shipping Condition  
Yes  
No  
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and time settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording  
programmes are also cancelled.  
Default Settings  
Yes  
No  
All the settings other than the programmed channels, time settings, country settings, language settings, disc language settings,  
ratings level, ratings password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.  
RQT8881  
66  
Tuning  
To change the tuning settings for individual  
programme position  
1
While stopped  
Pos  
Name  
Channel  
1
ARD  
4
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1]  
Manual  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Tuning  
Fine Tuning Auto  
to select a  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
Video System  
Mono  
Auto  
Off  
programme position  
and press [OK].  
SELECT  
Title Page  
301  
and press [OK].  
RETURN  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and  
RETURN : leave  
press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Tuning” and  
Pos  
To change the programme position in which  
the TV stations are assigned  
press [1].  
Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to select the  
number of the desired programme position and  
press [OK].  
Setup  
Manual Tuning  
Auto-Setup Restart  
Download from TV  
Tuning  
Disc  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
Connection  
Name  
Channel  
To enter or change the name of a TV station  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and  
press [OK].  
If the station name needs a blank space, select  
the blank between “Z” and “¢”.  
TAB  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
Others  
To enter newly available TV stations or change  
the channel number of an already tuned TV  
station  
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter  
the channel number of the desired TV station.  
Wait a few moments until the desired TV station  
has been tuned.  
Manual Tuning  
You can add or delete channels, or change programme positions.  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Manual  
Tuning” and press [OK].  
Manual Tuning  
After the desired TV station is tuned, press [OK].  
Fine Tuning  
To obtain the best tuning condition  
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition  
and press [OK].  
If you delete programme position  
of Host channel, GUIDE Plus+ data  
is also deleted. Continue?  
Press [1] to return to “Auto”.  
Video  
To select the video system type  
System  
Press [3, 4] to select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the  
picture lacks colour, and press [OK].  
Yes  
No  
Auto:  
This unit automatically distinguishes  
PAL and SECAM signals.  
For receiving PAL signals.  
If you select “Yes” and press [OK], the following screen  
appears.  
PAL:  
Manual Tuning  
SECAM: For receiving SECAM signals.  
Pos Name Ch  
Pos Name Ch  
1
2
ARD  
ZDF  
N3  
4
2
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
Mono  
To select the type of sound to be recorded  
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound is  
distorted due to inferior reception conditions, or if  
you want to record the normal (mono) sound  
during a stereo or bilingual broadcast, and press  
[OK].  
3
4
5
5
8
10  
HR3  
BR3  
6
7
8
9
SELECT  
OK  
RETURN  
10  
Delete  
Move  
Add  
Title Page  
To enter the Teletext title page for a channel  
Entering title page number allows the unit to  
automatically record programme and station  
names.  
To delete a programme position  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the  
“Red” button.  
Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to enter the  
number and press [OK].  
To find the correct title page for the station, refer  
to its Teletext TV guide.  
To add a blank programme position  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the  
“Green” button.  
To move a TV station to another programme position  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press  
the “Yellow” button.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the new programme position to  
which you want to assign the TV station and press [OK].  
You can make the following two settings by selecting the external  
input channel (AV1, AV2, AV3) in step 5.  
Video System (Auto/PAL/SECAM)  
In order to record properly, make the appropriate settings to match  
the connected equipment.  
Title Page (Auto/Off)  
[Note]  
When the unit connected to a Q Link compatible TV with a fully  
wired 21-pin Scart cable sets itself automatically (20), only  
deletion of the programme position can be performed.  
If you delete programme position of Host Channel, the GUIDE  
Plus+ data is also deleted.  
RQT8881  
67  
Changing the unit’s settings  
Refer to the control reference on page 62.  
Auto-Setup Restart  
TV System  
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting with,  
or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles on the  
HDD.  
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (20) fails for some reason.  
After performing steps 1–4 (67)  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Setup  
1
While stopped  
Restart” or “Download from TV” and  
press [OK].  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
The confirmation screen appears.  
Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a Q  
Link compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.  
(Programme positions are downloaded from the TV and  
copied through this convenient function.)  
and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and  
press [OK].  
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”  
press [OK].  
and press [1].  
If the country setting menu appears on the television  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the country and press  
[OK].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “TV System”  
and press [OK].  
Setup  
You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.  
When the unit is on and stopped  
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the  
country setting screen appears.  
TV System  
PAL  
NTSC  
Tuning  
Disc  
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and  
time settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording  
programmes are also cancelled.  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
SELECT  
OK  
Connection  
Others  
RETURN  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
6 Press [3, 4] to select the TV system  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
and press [OK].  
PAL (factory preset)  
When the GUIDE Plus+ system setting message appears.  
If you want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
Go to step 2 on page 21.  
–Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system  
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as PAL  
60.  
–Select to record television programmes and PAL input from  
other equipment.  
If you do not want to setup the GUIDE Plus+ system  
Press [2, 1] to select “No” and press [OK].  
Television picture appears. Setup is complete.  
[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the  
HDD.  
NTSC  
List of TV Reception Channels  
–Select when connecting to a NTSC television. Television  
programmes cannot be recorded properly.  
–Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.  
[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded on  
the HDD.  
TV Channel  
Channel indication  
Germany/Italy  
Other Countries  
2 – 4  
E2 – E10  
5 – 10  
E2 – E12  
E11 – E12  
(Germany)  
H1 – H2 (Italy)  
7 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
11 – 12  
press [OK].  
13 – 20  
21 – 69  
74 – 78  
80  
A – H (Only Italy)  
E21 – E69  
S01 – S05  
S1  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
E21 – E69  
S1 – S5  
M1  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
81 – 89  
90 – 99  
S2 – S10  
M2 – M10  
U1 – U10  
To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)  
While stopped, keep pressing [] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the  
main unit for 5 or more seconds.  
S11 – S20  
S21 – S41§  
(Hyperband)  
S21 – S41  
(Hyperband)  
121 – 141  
§ Only for 8 MHz channel raster  
[Note]  
This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC  
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded  
onto the HDD.)  
If “NTSC” has been selected, the GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be  
used.  
RQT8881  
68  
Manual Clock Setting  
Usually, the unit’s setup function (20) automatically adjusts the clock to correct time. Under some reception conditions, however, the unit  
cannot set the clock automatically.  
In this case, follow the operation steps below to manually set the clock.  
In the case of a power failure, the clock setting remains in memory for approximately 60 minutes.  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [1].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Clock” and press [OK].  
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press [OK].  
Clock  
Automatic Off  
Time  
15  
Date  
1
:
45  
:
39  
.
8
.
2007  
Number  
0
9
Please set clock manually.  
OK: store RETURN: leave  
CHANGE  
SELECT  
OK  
RETURN  
7 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.  
The items change as follows:  
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year  
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J  
8 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.  
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.  
9 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.  
The clock starts.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
[Note]  
If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when “Automatic” in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic time correction  
function checks the time and if necessary it is adjusted several times every day.  
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.  
Abkhazian:  
Afar:  
6566 Catalan:  
6565 Chinese:  
6570 Corsican:  
8381 Croatian:  
6577 Czech:  
6582 Danish:  
7289 Dutch:  
6583 English:  
6589 Esperanto:  
6590 Estonian:  
6665 Faroese:  
6985 Fiji:  
6765 Gujarati:  
9072 Hausa:  
6779 Hebrew:  
7282 Hindi:  
6783 Hungarian:  
6865 Icelandic:  
7876 Indonesian:  
6978 Interlingua:  
6979 Irish:  
7185 Lingala:  
7265 Lithuanian:  
7387 Macedonian:  
7273 Malagasy:  
7285 Malay:  
7383 Malayalam:  
7378 Maltese:  
7365 Maori:  
7165 Marathi:  
7384 Moldavian:  
7465 Mongolian:  
7487 Nauru:  
7578 Nepali:  
7583 Norwegian:  
7575 Oriya:  
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:  
7579 Persian:  
7585 Polish:  
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:  
Tamil:  
8465  
8484  
8469  
8472  
6679  
8473  
8479  
8482  
8475  
8487  
8575  
8582  
8590  
8673  
8679  
6789  
8779  
8872  
7473  
8979  
9085  
7684  
8277 Tatar:  
8279 Telugu:  
8285 Thai:  
8377 Tibetan:  
8365 Tigrinya:  
Afrikaans:  
Albanian:  
Ameharic:  
Arabic:  
Armenian:  
Assamese:  
Aymara:  
Azerbaijani:  
Bashkir:  
Basque:  
7775 Romanian:  
7771 Russian:  
7783 Samoan:  
7776 Sanskrit:  
7784 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Tonga:  
7773 Serbian: 8382 Turkish:  
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:  
6984 Italian:  
7779 Shona:  
7778 Sindhi:  
7865 Singhalese:  
7869 Slovak:  
7879 Slovenian:  
7982 Somali:  
8378 Twi:  
8368 Ukrainian:  
8373 Urdu:  
7079 Japanese:  
7074 Javanese:  
7073 Kannada:  
7082 Kashmiri:  
7089 Kazakh:  
7176 Kirghiz:  
7565 Korean:  
6869 Kurdish:  
6976 Laotian:  
7576 Latin:  
Bengali; Bangla:  
Finnish:  
8375 Uzbek:  
8376 Vietnamese:  
8379 Volapük:  
6983 Welsh:  
8385 Wolof:  
8387 Xhosa:  
8386 Yiddish:  
8476 Yoruba:  
8471 Zulu:  
6678 French:  
6890 Frisian:  
6672 Galician:  
6682 Georgian:  
6671 German:  
7789 Greek:  
Bhutani:  
Bihari:  
Breton:  
7065 Sundanese:  
8076 Swahili:  
8084 Swedish:  
8065 Tagalog:  
8185 Tajik:  
Bulgarian:  
Burmese:  
Byelorussian: 6669 Greenlandic:  
Cambodian: 7577 Guarani:  
7679 Portuguese:  
7665 Punjabi:  
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:  
RQT8881  
69  
Messages  
On the television  
Page  
Authorisation Error.  
You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different  
40, 41  
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)  
Cannot finish recording completely. The programme was copy-protected.  
26  
The HDD or disc may be full.  
The maximum number of times you can record the program is exceeded.  
Cannot playback.  
TV system is different from the  
setting.  
You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV  
system currently selected on the unit.  
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.  
68  
To playback, please change the TV  
System in Setup.  
Cannot record to the disc.  
Unable to format.  
The disc may be dirty or scratched.  
10  
39  
Cannot play on this unit.  
Cannot record. Disc is full.  
You tried to play a non-compatible image.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.  
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is  
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW  
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]  
47, 50,  
59  
Cannot record. Maximum number of  
titles exceeded.  
Use a new disc.  
No Disc  
The disc may be upside down.  
Not enough space in the copy  
destination.  
Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.  
47, 50,  
59  
Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination  
54  
Capacity” is not exceeded.  
This is a non-recordable disc.  
The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalised DVD-  
R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW.  
You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.  
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the  
HDD and then copy to the disc.  
4–5  
This disc is not formatted properly.  
Format it using DVD Management in  
FUNCTION MENU.  
59  
Not enough space on HDD. Space  
of 4 hours (in SP mode) is  
necessary.  
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD  
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are  
greater than 500.  
50  
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.  
Maximum number of titles is  
recorded on HDD. Please delete  
unnecessary titles.  
Rental Expired.  
The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX)  
41  
The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.  
$
RQT8881  
70  
On the unit’s display  
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.  
Page  
25  
DVD   
The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.  
(“” stands for a number.)  
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more  
than 5 seconds.  
GUIDE  
GUIDE Plus+ data is being downloaded.  
22  
HARD ERR§  
NoERAS  
If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.  
You cannot delete items on this disc.  
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.  
NoREAD  
The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.  
This message may appear when the DVD-RAM lens cleaner has finished cleaning.  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.  
10  
10  
NoWRIT  
You cannot write to this disc.  
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.  
PLEASE WAIT§  
There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying  
out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait  
until the message disappears.  
PROG FULL§  
There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes.  
33  
SP 35:50  
Available space on the HDD or disc.  
LP 151h  
“SP”,LP” and the numbers  
are examples.  
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP  
151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.  
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151  
hours”.  
UNFORMAT§  
You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video  
format) that has been recorded on other equipment.  
59  
Format the disc to use it.  
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.  
UNSUPPORT§  
F74  
You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.  
4–6  
The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.  
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.  
F75  
U59  
The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.  
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.  
The unit is hot.  
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message  
disappears.  
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear  
of the unit.  
U61  
(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or  
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not  
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.  
U72  
U73  
The HDMI connection acts unusually.  
–The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.  
–The HDMI cable is too long. Please use a cable 5.0 meters or less.  
–The HDMI cable is damaged.  
U76  
U88  
HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright  
protection.  
(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while  
recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to  
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.  
74  
U99  
The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby. Now press  
[Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.  
H or F  
There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s  
condition.)  
Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the  
following.  
74–79  
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.  
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)  
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the  
dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service  
.
X HOLD  
The Child Lock function is activated.  
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD” disappears.  
61  
§The message are alternately displayed.  
RQT8881  
71  
Frequently asked questions  
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.  
Set up  
Page  
What equipment is necessary to play  
multi channel surround sound?  
You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You must 16, 17  
connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a  
built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder.  
Are the headphones and speakers  
directly connected to the unit?  
You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc.  
16  
The television has a Scart terminal and If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube) we recommend using the Scart  
14–16  
component video input terminal. Which  
should I connect with?  
terminal. You can enjoy high-quality RGB video from this unit by connecting to an RGB  
compatible television.  
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan,  
connect through the component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.  
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using PAL mode that is  
compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive output as some  
flickering can occur.  
Is my television progressive output  
compatible?  
All Panasonic televisions that have 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p input terminals  
are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of television.  
Disc  
Can I play DVD-Video, and Video CDs  
bought in another country?  
You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not include “2” or “ALL.  
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.  
Cover  
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a  
region number be played?  
The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play  
discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to  
a standard.  
Please tell me about disc compatibility  
with this unit.  
This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and  
plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to a  
DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible).  
This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.  
4–6  
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following  
6, 39  
compatibility with this unit.  
standards: CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), DivX, MP3 and still  
pictures (JPEG).  
You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.  
Recording  
Can I record from a commercially  
purchased video cassette or DVD?  
Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording  
is usually not possible.  
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD- You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalising the disc on  
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW  
recorded on this unit be played on other  
equipment?  
this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and  
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.  
If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.  
Can I record digital audio signals using  
this unit?  
You cannot record digital signals. The digital audio terminals on this unit are for output  
only. (The audio recorded using the unit’s DV input terminal from a digital video  
camcorder, for example, is recorded digitally.)  
Can a digital audio signal from this unit  
be recorded to other equipment?  
You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio  
Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu.  
–PCM Down Conversion: On  
64  
–Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM  
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording  
equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.  
You cannot record MP3 signals.  
Can I switch to bilingual broadcast  
during recording?  
With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].  
(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”)  
38  
With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot. Change before  
recording with “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the Setup menu.  
64  
51  
Can I high speed copy to a disc?  
Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” before recording the  
programme.)  
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.  
RQT8881  
72  
GUIDE Plus+  
Why is the GUIDE Plus+ system only  
available after approx. 2 hours?  
Page  
The data rate, at which GUIDE Plus+ is sent, is limited. Depending on the country, signal  
quality and number of channels received, the time until the GUIDE Plus+ system is ready  
can vary.  
How often is the GUIDE Plus+ data  
updated and when?  
The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel (the television station  
transmitting the television programme list) several times a day. Data will be transmitted at  
2:50 AM every day.  
22  
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.  
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded automatically when the unit is turned off.  
Is it possible to programme a recording, You can manually change the start and end time of programmes in the Timer Recording  
32  
menu.  
with a start and end time that are  
different from the GUIDE Plus+ system?  
Does the GUIDE Plus+ system support The GUIDE Plus+ system works independently of VPS/PDC. However, you can  
34  
33  
programme TIMER recordings with VPS/PDC in the Timer Recording menu.  
VPS/PDC?  
How can I cancel a TIMER  
programming?  
The “F” symbol appears in the GUIDE Plus+ when a Timer Recording is programmed  
with the GUIDE Plus+ system. To cancel a Timer Recording programming, press [PROG/  
CHECK]. Select the desired entry and press [DELETE ¢].  
Can I receive GUIDE Plus+ system data No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with satellite receivers or Set  
32, 35  
Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your unit’s manual timer programming.  
via a connected satellite receiver or a  
Set Top Box?  
What happens when I unplug my unit  
from the power outlet?  
The GUIDE Plus+ system data will not be updated. If the unit is disconnected from the  
power supply for a longer period of time, then the GUIDE Plus+ data is lost. Make sure  
that the time is set again appropriately.  
What happens if my postal code  
changes, e.g. if I move?  
Change the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ Setup menu. If necessary, perform a full  
Auto-Setup. Saved GUIDE Plus+ data may be lost.  
23  
RQT8881  
73  
Troubleshooting guide  
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart  
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.  
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:  
Regular disc rotating sounds.  
Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.  
Image disturbance during search.  
Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting  
breaks.  
A sound is heard when the HDD goes into power save mode, or  
operations are slow to respond in power save mode.  
Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a  
Panasonic disc.)  
The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.  
(Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)  
When the HDD has been automatically placed in the power save  
mode (9), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an  
unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.  
Power  
Page  
No power.  
Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket.  
Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s  
display blinks when [Í DVD] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.  
14, 15  
35  
The unit does not turn on  
pressing [Í DVD].  
The unit switches to standby  
mode.  
One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to turn the unit on.  
The power is turned off  
automatically.  
If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control”-compatible TV with an HDMI cable, or  
connected this unit to a Q Link-compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit will  
be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode.  
18  
The power is turned on  
automatically.  
If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control”-compatible TV with an HDMI cable, this unit will  
automatically turn on while you are setting a timer recording from the programme listing on the  
TV.  
18  
Displays  
The display is dim.  
Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.  
65  
69  
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s  
display.  
Set the clock.  
The time recorded on the disc and Times shown may disagree with actual times.  
the available time shown do not  
add up.  
The play time shown for MP3  
does not agree with the actual  
time.  
Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the  
last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.  
Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no  
increase in disc space.  
More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,  
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.  
While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.  
The clock is not correct.  
Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time correction function may not work.  
In this case, “Automatic” is automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting  
does not work, set the time manually.  
69  
Compared to the actual recorded The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames  
time, the elapsed time displayed  
is less.  
(Only when recording in NTSC)  
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time  
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as  
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.  
“U88” is displayed and the disc  
cannot be ejected.  
The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.  
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.  
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10  
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.  
While the unit is off, press and hold [] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for  
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.  
2
TV screen and video  
Television reception worsens  
after connecting the unit.  
This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment. It  
can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved  
by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.  
Status messages do not appear. Select “Automatic” in “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu.  
65  
65  
The grey background does not  
appear.  
Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu.  
Picture does not appear during  
timer recording.  
Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off. To confirm the timer recording  
is going to work properly, turn the unit on.  
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture  
expands left and right.  
Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does not have that function, set  
“Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.  
45  
Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.  
65  
65  
63  
Screen size is wrong.  
If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to “16:9” in the Setup menu.  
By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be  
made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.  
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “4:3”.  
63  
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating  
instructions.  
RQT8881  
74  
TV screen and video (continued)  
Page  
Titles recorded with 16:9 aspect  
are stretched vertically.  
16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)”  
recording mode.  
63  
63  
–If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.  
–If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in the Setup menu.  
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same aspect, set “Rec for High Speed  
Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”.  
–By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be  
made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.  
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating  
instructions.  
There is a lot of after-image when Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”.  
45  
45  
playing video.  
When playing DVD-Video using  
progressive output, one part of  
the picture momentarily appears  
to be doubled up.  
Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method or  
material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.  
There is no apparent change in  
picture quality when adjusted  
with the Picture menu in the on-  
screen menus.  
The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.  
The images from this unit do not Make sure that the television is connected to the AV1 terminal, VIDEO OUT terminal,  
14–17  
appear on the television.  
S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI terminal on this unit.  
Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.  
Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.  
Press and hold [] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds  
to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.  
Picture is distorted.  
The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While  
stopped, keep pressing [] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.  
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.  
68  
When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with this unit’s TV  
system.  
Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.  
Reduce the number of connected devices.  
The picture is distorted during  
play, or video will not play  
correctly.  
You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or unfavorable weather  
conditions.  
The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear briefly between recorded titles in  
the following situations:  
–between titles recorded with different recording modes.  
–between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.  
–between scenes recorded with different resolutions.  
–between playlist chapters.  
Sound  
No sound.  
Low volume.  
Distorted sound.  
Cannot hear the desired audio  
type.  
Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the  
amplifier if you have connected one.  
14–17,  
64  
Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.  
38  
Turn off V.S.S. in the following cases.  
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.  
–When playing bilingual broadcast programmes.  
45  
Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)  
Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.  
Reduce the number of connected devices.  
The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT  
terminal or the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.  
To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “Digital Audio Output” to  
“HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu.  
Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected  
with an HDMI cable.  
If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you  
can only record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.  
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),  
+R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”.  
65  
63  
Cannot switch audio.  
You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.  
–When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the  
disc tray while DVD drive is selected.  
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.  
–When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default setting is “On”).  
The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an HDMI cable. You cannot switch  
the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using  
audio cables.  
64  
63  
16, 17,  
64  
There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.  
RQT8881  
75  
Troubleshooting guide  
Operation  
Page  
24  
Cannot operate the television.  
The remote control doesn’t work.  
Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the  
code.  
The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote  
control.  
25  
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time  
for more than 5 seconds.  
The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.  
You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during  
operation.  
11  
Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.  
Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight  
exposure.  
It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries. 24–25  
It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.  
The child lock function is activated.  
24  
61  
The unit is on but cannot be  
operated.  
Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.  
Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.  
The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.  
One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.  
Reset the unit as follows:  
26, 36  
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.  
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10  
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.  
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.  
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated, consult the  
dealer.  
2
HDD activation is slow.  
Cannot eject disc.  
The HDD is in power save mode.  
9
The unit is recording.  
Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s  
display blinks when [Í DVD] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.  
The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [] and [CH W] on the  
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.  
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock  
function.  
35  
61  
Cannot tune channels.  
Check the connections.  
You must connect to a television equipped with the Q Link function with a fully wired 21-pin  
Scart cable to download channel presets.  
14–15  
Cannot download channel  
presets from the television.  
Startup is slow.  
Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.  
66  
Startup takes time in the following situations:  
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.  
–The clock is not set.  
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.  
–For a few minutes after 5:15 am due to system maintenance of this unit.  
–When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.  
RQT8881  
76  
Recording, timer recording and copying  
Page  
4, 5  
Cannot record.  
Cannot copy.  
You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the  
unit can record onto.  
The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the disc is protected with DVD  
Management.  
Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).  
You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached  
its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.  
59  
58  
80  
47, 50,  
59  
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.  
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.  
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the  
47, 50,  
59  
HDD and then copy.  
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a  
blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode  
recording is necessary).  
–If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 500.  
You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you can record and copy again if  
you format DVD-RW.  
Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and  
+RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or  
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit  
may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.  
This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC signals. (However, both types  
of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with both PAL and  
NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.  
Cannot record from external  
equipment.  
Check that the connection is correct.  
14–15,  
56  
Select the input channel (“AV2”, “AV3” or “DV”) for the equipment you have connected.  
Timer recording does not work  
properly.  
The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap. Correct the  
33  
33  
programme.  
The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “F” in the timer recording  
list is not on.)  
Set the clock.  
69  
33  
Timer recording does not stop  
even when [] is pressed.  
Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
recording drive.  
When using the linked timer recording with external equipment, press [EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L”  
disappears.)  
If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”,  
you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.  
35  
VPS/PDC does not work.  
VPS/PDC will activate when this unit is set to standby mode. While this unit is on, recording  
starts and finishes at times you set initially.  
34  
32  
VPS/PDC does not work when  
making a timer recording using a  
SHOWVIEW number.  
If a programme listed in a newspaper or magazine has two SHOWVIEW numbers, use the  
SHOWVIEW number for VPS/PDC.  
A part or whole of a recorded  
title has been lost.  
If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household mains socket while  
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.  
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer  
any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.  
59  
The programme name and the  
recorded title do not match.  
There was a programme change after timer recording was set but the recorded title still has  
the old programme name.  
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc.  
disc using the high speed mode.  
When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” in the Setup menu. (The  
default setting is “On”).  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot  
perform high-speed copy.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD recorders with “Rec for High  
Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL  
or +RW discs with high-speed copy.  
63  
When copying, it takes a long  
time even when high speed  
mode is selected.  
Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed  
recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the  
disc.  
It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.  
You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic  
DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.  
An unusually loud sound is  
coming from the rotating DVD-R,  
etc.  
When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video  
format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal,  
however, this is not a problem.  
The DV automatic recording  
function does not work.  
If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV  
equipment settings.  
You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.  
Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV  
equipment are not successive.  
Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.  
The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.  
56  
56  
RQT8881  
77  
Troubleshooting guide  
Play  
Page  
Play fails to start even when  
[1] (PLAY) is pressed.  
Play starts but then stops  
immediately.  
Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.  
36  
10  
The disc is dirty.  
You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.  
You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the equipment used for recording.  
You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM  
using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to  
copyright protection.  
4–6  
When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD  
players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 Hours)” mode.  
You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.  
63  
41  
If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)  
Audio and video momentarily  
pause.  
This occurs between playlist chapters.  
This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high  
speed mode.  
This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.  
5
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches  
between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video  
and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.  
DVD-Video is not played.  
You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.  
63  
Alternative soundtrack and  
subtitles cannot be selected.  
The languages are not recorded on the disc.  
You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on  
some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.  
37  
No subtitles.  
Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.  
Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.  
44  
Angle cannot be changed.  
Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.  
You have forgotten your ratings  
password.  
You want to cancel the ratings  
level.  
The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc tray is open, press and hold  
[¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will  
appear on the unit’s display).  
Quick View does not work.  
This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.  
This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.  
The resume play function does  
not work.  
Memorized positions are cancelled when  
–press [] several times.  
–open the disc tray (excluding [HDD]).  
[CD] [VCD] turn off the power.  
–if a recording or timer recording was executed.  
The Video CD picture does not  
display properly.  
When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the Setup menu.  
When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed correctly during  
search.  
68  
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does These functions do not work with finalised discs.  
68  
not work.  
Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different from the title  
recorded on the disc.  
It takes time before play starts.  
Picture stops.  
This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)  
Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)  
Cannot see the beginning of the (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)  
title played.  
When the TV is set to off and [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control to start play,  
the TV power will automatically turn on, but you may not be able to see the beginning of the  
title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the beginning of the  
title.  
Edit  
Available disc space does not  
increase even after deleting a  
title.  
Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL.  
Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video  
format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.  
50  
Cannot edit.  
You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.  
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.  
50  
Cannot format.  
The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.  
You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.  
10  
4–6  
Cannot create chapters.  
The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the  
disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.  
These operations are not possible with still pictures.  
You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a  
start point.  
Cannot mark the start point or  
the end point during “Partial  
Delete” operation.  
Cannot delete chapters.  
Cannot create a playlist.  
When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.  
47  
You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures. Select  
them individually.  
RQT8881  
78  
Still pictures  
Page  
Cannot display Direct Navigator  
screen.  
This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy or while the unit is standing by for  
linked timer recording with external equipment.  
GUIDE Plus+  
The GUIDE Plus+ System does  
not receive any data.  
Check whether GUIDE Plus+ system setup was performed in full.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system data is updated several times each day. When the unit is first  
connected, the GUIDE Plus+ system is not yet ready to receive data.  
It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.  
Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately one day before you can  
display the television programme list.  
21–23  
Check whether the clock is properly set.  
69  
If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the GUIDE Plus+ system may not  
be able to receive any data.  
“No Data” is displayed for some These stations may not have been able to be identified automatically.  
22  
or all stations.  
For these stations, select the “On” in the sub menu under “Editor” and assign the correct  
reference station manually.  
Some stations are not supported by the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
The GUIDE Plus+ information is  
not displayed properly.  
The reference station is not assigned correctly in “Editor”.  
Select the correct reference station.  
22  
There was a programme change.  
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the GUIDE Plus+ system provider or  
station provider.  
The GUIDE Plus+ data transfer  
was interrupted.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system shows the data that was received up to the interruption.  
The programme information may be incomplete.  
The GUIDE Plus+ data is not  
updated.  
The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the data. If the unit is in EXT LINK mode  
(EXT-L lights up in the display), then the data update may also not work.  
Make sure that the time is set correctly.  
23  
Check whether “Off” is set under “Night Download” and change the setting in GUIDE Plus+.  
“No Data” is displayed in the  
GUIDE Plus+ system.  
Programme the Timer recording manually or via SHOWVIEW.  
32  
VIERA Link  
VIERA Link doesn’t work.  
Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is displayed on the front display when  
the power for the main unit is set to On.  
Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.  
65  
Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.  
If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was changed, or if there was a  
power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”  
may not work.  
In this case, perform the following operations.  
1
2
3
When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on, turn the TV  
(VIERA) on again.  
Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control” function to off, and then set to on  
again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)  
Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit, and after this unit’s screen is  
displayed check that “HDAVI Control” is working.  
To reset this unit  
To return all the settings other  
than the main ones to the factory  
preset  
Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the settings except for the ratings  
level, ratings password and time settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording  
programmes are also cancelled.  
Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the settings other than the  
programmed channels, time settings, country settings, language settings, disc language  
settings, ratings level, ratings password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.  
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the Country setting screen appears.  
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and time settings return to the  
factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.  
66  
66  
To reset the ratings level  
settings  
While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and  
hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.  
To restore the unit if it freezes  
due to one of the safety devices  
being activated  
Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.)  
RQT8881  
79  
Glossary  
Bitstream  
Film and video  
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)  
before it is decoded into its various channels.  
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can  
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable  
method of progressive output.  
Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24 frames  
per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at 30  
frames per second as well.)  
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.  
Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL discs) or  
30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally  
appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.  
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)  
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to  
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with  
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.  
Decoder  
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This  
is called decoding.  
DivX  
Finalise  
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX  
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality  
that maintains a relatively small file size.  
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.  
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this  
unit.  
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer  
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for  
recording again.  
Dolby Digital  
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby  
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can  
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can  
be recorded on one disc using this method.  
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default  
audio.  
Folder  
This is a place on the disc where groups of data are stored together.  
In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where still pictures  
(JPEG) are stored.  
Down-mixing  
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on  
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to  
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s  
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then  
only output the front two channels.  
Formatting  
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM  
recordable on recording equipment.  
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),  
+RW and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.  
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.  
Drive  
Frames and fields  
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see  
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.  
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD) and disc  
(DVD). These perform the reading and writing of data.  
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)  
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good  
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are  
possible.  
u
r
Frame  
Field  
Field  
Dynamic range  
A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but  
picture quality is generally better.  
A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but  
there is no blurring.  
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound  
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest  
level of sound before distortion occurs.  
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the  
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low  
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.  
HDD (Hard disk drive)  
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk  
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and  
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading  
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)  
HDMI is a next-generation digital interface for consumer electronic  
products. Unlike conventional connections, it transmits  
uncompressed digital video and audio signals on a single cable. This  
unit supports high-definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i  
(1125i), 1080p (1125p)] from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy  
high-definition video a high definition compatible television is  
required.  
RQT8881  
80  
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)  
RGB  
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.  
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,  
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The  
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering  
the degree of compression.  
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),  
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.  
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,  
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.  
Sampling frequency  
LPCM (Linear PCM)  
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on  
CDs. LPCM sound is available when recording in XP mode.  
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave  
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital  
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per  
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the  
original sound.  
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)  
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.  
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based  
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.  
Thumbnail  
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display  
multiple pictures in the form of a list.  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)  
An audio compression method that compresses audio to  
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of  
audio quality. You can play MP3 you have recorded onto CD-R and  
CD-RW.  
1080i  
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass  
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because  
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of  
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic  
and rich image.  
Pan&Scan/Letterbox  
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be  
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images  
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of  
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.  
Pan & Scan:The sides are cut off so the picture fills  
the screen.  
1080p  
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the  
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.  
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,  
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.  
720p  
Letterbox:Black bands appear at the top and bottom  
of the picture so the picture itself appears in  
an aspect ratio of 16:9.  
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same  
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since  
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there  
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.  
Playback control (PBC)  
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and  
information with menus.  
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)  
Progressive/Interlace  
The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan  
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses  
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are  
called 480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively.  
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video  
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.  
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.  
Panasonic televisions with 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p  
input terminals are progressive compatible.  
Protection  
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or  
deletion protection.  
RQT8881  
81  
Specifications  
Recording system  
HDMI Output  
19 pin type A: 1 pc  
Logical layer  
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 2” function.  
DVD Video  
Recording  
format  
DVD-Video  
format  
+VR  
Video  
format  
Video system:  
SECAM (only input)/PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields  
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields  
DVD-RAM  
DVD-R  
OK  
-
-
-
OK§1  
OK§1  
OK§1  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Recording system:  
Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
S-Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):  
AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
RGB in (PAL): AV2 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 , termination  
Video out (PAL/NTSC):  
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer)  
-
DVD-RW  
-
+R  
OK  
OK  
OK  
+R DL (Double Layer)  
+RW  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):  
Recordable discs  
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):  
DVD-RAM:  
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),  
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)  
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),  
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)  
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)  
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),  
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)  
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),  
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)  
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)  
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)  
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 , termination  
DVD-R:  
DVD-R DL:  
DVD-RW:  
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 , termination  
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 , termination  
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 , termination  
+R:  
Television system  
+R DL:  
+RW:  
Tuner system  
Channel coverage  
PAL-BGH  
SECAM-BG  
(CCIR)  
VHF: E2–E12, A–H2 (Italy)  
UHF: 21–69  
CATV: S01–S05 (S1–S3),  
S1–S20 (M1–U10), S21–S41  
Recording time  
Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)  
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours  
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours  
Maximum Approx. 284 hours with 160 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)  
XP: Approx. 36 hours, SP: Approx. 70 hours  
RF converter output:  
Not provided  
DV input  
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc  
LP: Approx. 138 hours, EP: Approx. 212 hours/284 hours  
Others  
Playable discs  
Region code:  
2  
5 oC to 40 oC  
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)  
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz  
Approx. 32 W  
Logical layer  
Operating temperature:  
Operating humidity range:  
Power supply:  
Power consumption:  
Dimensions (WkDkH):  
Mass:  
Recordable disc  
DVD Video  
Recording  
format  
OK  
-
DVD-Video  
format  
+VR  
format  
DVD-RAM  
DVD-R  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer)  
DVD-RW  
-
-
-
-
-
430 mmk330 mmk59 mm  
Approx. 4.2 kg  
OK  
OK  
OK  
-
-
-
-
Power consumption in standby mode:  
Approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)  
Approx. 11 W (Quick Start mode)  
OK  
+R  
-
-
-
OK  
OK  
OK  
+R DL (Double Layer)  
+RW  
[Note]  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
§1 It is compatible to a DVD-Video format after finalised.  
Read only disc  
DVD  
Logical layer  
DVD-Video  
§2 Conforming to IEC62107  
This unit is not compatible with “Chaoji VCD” available on the  
market including CVD, DVCD and SVCD that do not conform to  
IEC62107.  
DVD-R/DVD-R DL MP3, JPEG, DivX  
CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD§2  
CD  
CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD§2, MP3, JPEG, DivX  
CD-R/CD-RW  
Internal HDD capacity  
160 GB  
Optical pick-up  
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units  
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)  
LASER specification  
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)  
Wave length:  
CD  
780 nm wave length  
662 nm wave length  
DVD  
Laser power:  
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection  
Audio  
Recording system:  
Audio in:  
Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack)  
Input level:  
Input impedance:  
Audio out:  
Output level:  
Output impedance:  
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)  
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz  
More than 10 k≠  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)  
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz  
Less than 1 k≠  
RQT8881  
82  
Safety precautions  
Placement  
Foreign matter  
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high  
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These  
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby  
shortening the unit’s service life.  
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric  
shock or malfunction.  
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or  
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the  
power supply and contact your dealer.  
Do not place heavy items on the unit.  
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain  
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.  
Voltage  
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit  
and cause a fire.  
Service  
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when  
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.  
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is  
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other  
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect  
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service  
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is  
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.  
AC mains lead protection  
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not  
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or  
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.  
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC  
mains lead can cause electric shock.  
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power  
source if it is not to be used for a long time.  
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric  
shock.  
Information on Disposal for Users of Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment (private households)  
This symbol on the products and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should  
not be mixed with general household waste.  
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling, please take these products to designated collection points, where they will  
be accepted on a free of charge basis. Alternatively, in some countries you may be able to return your products to your  
local retailer upon the purchase of an equivalent new product.  
Disposing of this product correctly will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on  
human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. Please contact your  
local authority for further details of your nearest designated collection point.  
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.  
For business users in the European Union  
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.  
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union  
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.  
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface  
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial  
Co., Ltd.  
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS  
2.0iDigital Out” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.  
GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW are (1) registered trademarks or  
trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3)  
subject of various international patents and patent applications  
owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.  
and/or its related affiliates.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is  
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized  
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited  
consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR  
ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY  
LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM  
SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE  
PLUSi SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV  
GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED  
AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS  
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF  
BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR  
Official DivX® Certified product.  
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®6) with standard  
playback of DivX® media files.  
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of  
DivX, Inc. and are used under license.  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH  
THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION,  
EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE  
GUIDE PLUSi SYSTEM.  
RQT8881  
83  
Index  
A
GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . 21–23, 30–31  
Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Rec for High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . 28, 63  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 63  
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
External Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30–34  
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
RGB  
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Audio  
Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
AV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
H
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 65, 80  
IImportant notes for recording . . . . . . . 8  
J
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 81  
L
Language  
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 63  
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 63  
AV-in NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
C
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Channel  
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 81  
M
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 46  
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Cleaning  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Clock settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Connection  
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Menu  
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40–41  
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Mode  
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
S
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Shipping Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
SHOWVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 29  
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Still picture  
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 42  
N
Name  
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15  
Amplifier, system component . . . . . . . . 16  
Digital receiver, satellite receiver,  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 47  
Noise reduction (NR)  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–17  
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . 14, 16  
Copy  
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Country setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 47  
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
T
Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
AV-in NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30–34  
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Tuning  
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Playback NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
O
On-screen  
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
P
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
V
PCM Down Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 64  
Playback NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 45, 81  
Properties  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Protection  
V.S.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 65  
VPS/PDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
D
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Delete  
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 49  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
DELETE Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Dialog Enhancer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 42, 46  
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6  
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39–41, 80  
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Q
Q Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
E
Enabling discs to be played on other  
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
R
equipment - Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Ext Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 66  
F
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 60, 80  
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 59, 80  
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . . . . . 27  
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . 61  
G
Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.  
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.  
p
RQT8881-L  
F0107KJ0  

Jenn Air Cooktop CVE4210 User Manual
LG Electronics LG Life Good Computer Monitor IPS226V User Manual
Logitech Wireless Desktop MK300 User Manual
Miele Cooktop KM 417 User Manual
Mitsubishi Electronics CS 35305 User Manual
Moffat Blue Seal G518D CB User Manual
NEC AccuSync LCD223WM User Manual
Panasonic BT H1700AE User Manual
Philips 29PT8413 User Manual
Philips DVP3254KX User Manual